зеркало из https://github.com/mozilla/pjs.git
6855 строки
251 KiB
C++
6855 строки
251 KiB
C++
/* -*- Mode: C++; tab-width: 2; indent-tabs-mode: nil; c-basic-offset: 2 -*- */
|
|
/* vim: set ts=2 sw=2 et tw=80: */
|
|
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
|
|
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
|
|
*
|
|
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version
|
|
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with
|
|
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
|
|
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
|
|
*
|
|
* Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
|
|
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License
|
|
* for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the
|
|
* License.
|
|
*
|
|
* The Original Code is mozilla.org code.
|
|
*
|
|
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
|
|
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
|
|
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1998
|
|
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
|
|
*
|
|
* Contributor(s):
|
|
* Pierre Phaneuf <pp@ludusdesign.com>
|
|
* Mats Palmgren <mats.palmgren@bredband.net>
|
|
*
|
|
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of
|
|
* either of the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"),
|
|
* or the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"),
|
|
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead
|
|
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only
|
|
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to
|
|
* use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your
|
|
* decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice
|
|
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete
|
|
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under
|
|
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL.
|
|
*
|
|
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
|
|
#include "nsCOMPtr.h"
|
|
#include "nsVoidArray.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsIRenderingContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleConsts.h"
|
|
#include "nsIContent.h"
|
|
#include "nsCellMap.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableCellFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsHTMLParts.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableColFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableColGroupFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableRowFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableRowGroupFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableOuterFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTablePainter.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "BasicTableLayoutStrategy.h"
|
|
#include "FixedTableLayoutStrategy.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "nsPresContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSRendering.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleConsts.h"
|
|
#include "nsGkAtoms.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSAnonBoxes.h"
|
|
#include "nsIPresShell.h"
|
|
#include "nsIDOMElement.h"
|
|
#include "nsIDOMHTMLElement.h"
|
|
#include "nsIDOMHTMLBodyElement.h"
|
|
#include "nsIScrollableFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsFrameManager.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSRendering.h"
|
|
#include "nsLayoutErrors.h"
|
|
#include "nsAutoPtr.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSFrameConstructor.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleSet.h"
|
|
#include "nsDisplayList.h"
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
** nsTableReflowState **
|
|
********************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
struct nsTableReflowState {
|
|
|
|
// the real reflow state
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& reflowState;
|
|
|
|
// The table's available size
|
|
nsSize availSize;
|
|
|
|
// Stationary x-offset
|
|
nscoord x;
|
|
|
|
// Running y-offset
|
|
nscoord y;
|
|
|
|
nsTableReflowState(nsPresContext& aPresContext,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
nscoord aAvailWidth,
|
|
nscoord aAvailHeight)
|
|
: reflowState(aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
Init(aPresContext, aTableFrame, aAvailWidth, aAvailHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void Init(nsPresContext& aPresContext,
|
|
nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
nscoord aAvailWidth,
|
|
nscoord aAvailHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame* table = (nsTableFrame*)aTableFrame.GetFirstInFlow();
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = table->GetChildAreaOffset(&reflowState);
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingX = table->GetCellSpacingX();
|
|
|
|
x = borderPadding.left + cellSpacingX;
|
|
y = borderPadding.top; //cellspacing added during reflow
|
|
|
|
availSize.width = aAvailWidth;
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != availSize.width) {
|
|
availSize.width -= borderPadding.left + borderPadding.right
|
|
+ (2 * cellSpacingX);
|
|
availSize.width = PR_MAX(0, availSize.width);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
availSize.height = aAvailHeight;
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != availSize.height) {
|
|
availSize.height -= borderPadding.top + borderPadding.bottom
|
|
+ (2 * table->GetCellSpacingY());
|
|
availSize.height = PR_MAX(0, availSize.height);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableReflowState(nsPresContext& aPresContext,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsTableFrame& aTableFrame)
|
|
: reflowState(aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
Init(aPresContext, aTableFrame, aReflowState.availableWidth, aReflowState.availableHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
** nsTableFrame **
|
|
********************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
struct BCPropertyData
|
|
{
|
|
BCPropertyData() { mDamageArea.x = mDamageArea.y = mDamageArea.width = mDamageArea.height =
|
|
mTopBorderWidth = mRightBorderWidth = mBottomBorderWidth = mLeftBorderWidth = 0; }
|
|
nsRect mDamageArea;
|
|
BCPixelSize mTopBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mRightBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mBottomBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mLeftBorderWidth;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetParentStyleContextFrame(nsPresContext* aPresContext,
|
|
nsIFrame** aProviderFrame,
|
|
PRBool* aIsChild)
|
|
{
|
|
// Since our parent, the table outer frame, returned this frame, we
|
|
// must return whatever our parent would normally have returned.
|
|
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(mParent, "table constructed without outer table");
|
|
if (!mContent->GetParent() && !GetStyleContext()->GetPseudoType()) {
|
|
// We're the root. We have no style context parent.
|
|
*aIsChild = PR_FALSE;
|
|
*aProviderFrame = nsnull;
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return static_cast<nsFrame*>(mParent)->
|
|
DoGetParentStyleContextFrame(aPresContext, aProviderFrame, aIsChild);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nsIAtom*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetType() const
|
|
{
|
|
return nsGkAtoms::tableFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::nsTableFrame(nsStyleContext* aContext)
|
|
: nsHTMLContainerFrame(aContext),
|
|
mCellMap(nsnull),
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy(nsnull)
|
|
{
|
|
mBits.mHaveReflowedColGroups = PR_FALSE;
|
|
mBits.mCellSpansPctCol = PR_FALSE;
|
|
mBits.mNeedToCalcBCBorders = PR_FALSE;
|
|
mBits.mIsBorderCollapse = PR_FALSE;
|
|
mBits.mResizedColumns = PR_FALSE; // only really matters if splitting
|
|
mBits.mGeometryDirty = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMPL_ADDREF_INHERITED(nsTableFrame, nsHTMLContainerFrame)
|
|
NS_IMPL_RELEASE_INHERITED(nsTableFrame, nsHTMLContainerFrame)
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::QueryInterface(const nsIID& aIID, void** aInstancePtr)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aInstancePtr, "null out param");
|
|
|
|
if (aIID.Equals(NS_GET_IID(nsITableLayout))) {
|
|
*aInstancePtr = static_cast<nsITableLayout*>(this);
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nsHTMLContainerFrame::QueryInterface(aIID, aInstancePtr);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::Init(nsIContent* aContent,
|
|
nsIFrame* aParent,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevInFlow)
|
|
{
|
|
nsresult rv;
|
|
|
|
// Let the base class do its processing
|
|
rv = nsHTMLContainerFrame::Init(aContent, aParent, aPrevInFlow);
|
|
|
|
// record that children that are ignorable whitespace should be excluded
|
|
mState |= NS_FRAME_EXCLUDE_IGNORABLE_WHITESPACE;
|
|
|
|
// see if border collapse is on, if so set it
|
|
const nsStyleTableBorder* tableStyle = GetStyleTableBorder();
|
|
PRBool borderCollapse = (NS_STYLE_BORDER_COLLAPSE == tableStyle->mBorderCollapse);
|
|
SetBorderCollapse(borderCollapse);
|
|
// Create the cell map
|
|
if (!aPrevInFlow) {
|
|
mCellMap = new nsTableCellMap(*this, borderCollapse);
|
|
if (!mCellMap)
|
|
return NS_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY;
|
|
} else {
|
|
mCellMap = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aPrevInFlow) {
|
|
// set my width, because all frames in a table flow are the same width and
|
|
// code in nsTableOuterFrame depends on this being set
|
|
mRect.width = aPrevInFlow->GetSize().width;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!mTableLayoutStrategy, "strategy was created before Init was called");
|
|
// create the strategy
|
|
if (IsAutoLayout())
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = new BasicTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
else
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = new FixedTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
if (!mTableLayoutStrategy)
|
|
return NS_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::~nsTableFrame()
|
|
{
|
|
if (nsnull!=mCellMap) {
|
|
delete mCellMap;
|
|
mCellMap = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (nsnull!=mTableLayoutStrategy) {
|
|
delete mTableLayoutStrategy;
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::Destroy()
|
|
{
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFrames();
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::Destroy();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Make sure any views are positioned properly
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsContainerFrame::PositionFrameView(aFrame);
|
|
nsContainerFrame::PositionChildViews(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
IsRepeatedFrame(nsIFrame* kidFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
return (kidFrame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame ||
|
|
kidFrame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame) &&
|
|
(kidFrame->GetStateBits() & NS_REPEATED_ROW_OR_ROWGROUP);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::PageBreakAfter(nsIFrame& aSourceFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aNextFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aSourceFrame.GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
// don't allow a page break after a repeated element ...
|
|
if (display->mBreakAfter && !IsRepeatedFrame(&aSourceFrame)) {
|
|
return !(aNextFrame && IsRepeatedFrame(aNextFrame)); // or before
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aNextFrame) {
|
|
display = aNextFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
// don't allow a page break before a repeated element ...
|
|
if (display->mBreakBefore && !IsRepeatedFrame(aNextFrame)) {
|
|
return !IsRepeatedFrame(&aSourceFrame); // or after
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be cleaned up so that the frame constructor breaks out col group
|
|
// frames into a separate child list, bug 343048.
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetInitialChildList(nsIAtom* aListName,
|
|
nsIFrame* aChildList)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
if (!mFrames.IsEmpty() || !mColGroups.IsEmpty()) {
|
|
// We already have child frames which means we've already been
|
|
// initialized
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("unexpected second call to SetInitialChildList");
|
|
return NS_ERROR_UNEXPECTED;
|
|
}
|
|
if (aListName) {
|
|
// All we know about is the unnamed principal child list
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("unknown frame list");
|
|
return NS_ERROR_INVALID_ARG;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame *childFrame = aChildList;
|
|
nsIFrame *prevMainChild = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame *prevColGroupChild = nsnull;
|
|
for ( ; nsnull!=childFrame; )
|
|
{
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* childDisplay = childFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
// XXX this if should go away
|
|
if (PR_TRUE==IsRowGroup(childDisplay->mDisplay))
|
|
{
|
|
if (mFrames.IsEmpty())
|
|
mFrames.SetFrames(childFrame);
|
|
else
|
|
prevMainChild->SetNextSibling(childFrame);
|
|
prevMainChild = childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == childFrame->GetType(),
|
|
"This is not a colgroup");
|
|
if (mColGroups.IsEmpty())
|
|
mColGroups.SetFrames(childFrame);
|
|
else
|
|
prevColGroupChild->SetNextSibling(childFrame);
|
|
prevColGroupChild = childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{ // unknown frames go on the main list for now
|
|
if (mFrames.IsEmpty())
|
|
mFrames.SetFrames(childFrame);
|
|
else
|
|
prevMainChild->SetNextSibling(childFrame);
|
|
prevMainChild = childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
nsIFrame *prevChild = childFrame;
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
prevChild->SetNextSibling(nsnull);
|
|
}
|
|
if (nsnull!=prevMainChild)
|
|
prevMainChild->SetNextSibling(nsnull);
|
|
if (nsnull!=prevColGroupChild)
|
|
prevColGroupChild->SetNextSibling(nsnull);
|
|
|
|
// If we have a prev-in-flow, then we're a table that has been split and
|
|
// so don't treat this like an append
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
// process col groups first so that real cols get constructed before
|
|
// anonymous ones due to cells in rows.
|
|
InsertColGroups(0, mColGroups.FirstChild());
|
|
AppendRowGroups(mFrames.FirstChild());
|
|
// calc collapsing borders if this is the default (row group, col group, child list)
|
|
if (!aChildList && IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0, 0, GetColCount(), GetRowCount());
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsContainingBlock() const
|
|
{
|
|
return PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::AttributeChangedFor(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsIContent* aContent,
|
|
nsIAtom* aAttribute)
|
|
{
|
|
if (IS_TABLE_CELL(aFrame->GetType())) {
|
|
if ((nsGkAtoms::rowspan == aAttribute) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::colspan == aAttribute)) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
// for now just remove the cell from the map and reinsert it
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* cellFrame = (nsTableCellFrame*)aFrame;
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex, colIndex;
|
|
cellFrame->GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
cellFrame->GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
RemoveCell(cellFrame, rowIndex);
|
|
nsAutoVoidArray cells;
|
|
cells.AppendElement(cellFrame);
|
|
InsertCells(cells, rowIndex, colIndex - 1);
|
|
|
|
// XXX Should this use eStyleChange? It currently doesn't need
|
|
// to, but it might given more optimization.
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->
|
|
FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange, NS_FRAME_IS_DIRTY);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* ****** CellMap methods ******* */
|
|
|
|
/* return the effective col count */
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveColCount() const
|
|
{
|
|
PRInt32 colCount = GetColCount();
|
|
// don't count cols at the end that don't have originating cells
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = colCount - 1; colX >= 0; colX--) {
|
|
if (GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(colX) <= 0) {
|
|
colCount--;
|
|
}
|
|
else break;
|
|
}
|
|
return colCount;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetIndexOfLastRealCol()
|
|
{
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = mColFrames.Count();
|
|
if (numCols > 0) {
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = numCols - 1; colX >= 0; colX--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colX);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell != colFrame->GetColType()) {
|
|
return colX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return -1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableColFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColFrame(PRInt32 aColIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!GetPrevInFlow(), "GetColFrame called on next in flow");
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = mColFrames.Count();
|
|
if ((aColIndex >= 0) && (aColIndex < numCols)) {
|
|
return (nsTableColFrame *)mColFrames.ElementAt(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ERROR("invalid col index");
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveRowSpan(PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
const nsTableCellFrame& aCell) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (nsnull != cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
return cellMap->GetEffectiveRowSpan(aRowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveRowSpan(const nsTableCellFrame& aCell,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex, rowIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
aCell.GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
|
|
if (aCellMap)
|
|
return aCellMap->GetRowSpan(rowIndex, colIndex, PR_TRUE);
|
|
else
|
|
return tableCellMap->GetEffectiveRowSpan(rowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveColSpan(const nsTableCellFrame& aCell,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex, rowIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
aCell.GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
PRBool ignore;
|
|
|
|
if (aCellMap)
|
|
return aCellMap->GetEffectiveColSpan(*tableCellMap, rowIndex, colIndex, ignore);
|
|
else
|
|
return tableCellMap->GetEffectiveColSpan(rowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::HasMoreThanOneCell(PRInt32 aRowIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
return tableCellMap->HasMoreThanOneCell(aRowIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveCOLSAttribute()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (GetCellMap(), "null cellMap.");
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 result;
|
|
result = GetStyleTable()->mCols;
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
if (result > numCols)
|
|
result = numCols;
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::AdjustRowIndices(PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRInt32 aAdjustment)
|
|
{
|
|
// Iterate over the row groups and adjust the row indices of all rows
|
|
// whose index is >= aRowIndex.
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
rowGroups[rgX]->AdjustRowIndices(aRowIndex, aAdjustment);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::ResetRowIndices(nsIFrame* aFirstRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aLastRowGroupFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
// Iterate over the row groups and adjust the row indices of all rows
|
|
// omit the rowgroups that will be inserted later
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex = 0;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* newRgFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* omitRgFrame = aFirstRowGroupFrame;
|
|
if (omitRgFrame) {
|
|
newRgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(omitRgFrame);
|
|
if (omitRgFrame == aLastRowGroupFrame)
|
|
omitRgFrame = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
if (rgFrame == newRgFrame) {
|
|
// omit the new rowgroup
|
|
if (omitRgFrame) {
|
|
omitRgFrame = omitRgFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (omitRgFrame) {
|
|
newRgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(omitRgFrame);
|
|
if (omitRgFrame == aLastRowGroupFrame)
|
|
omitRgFrame = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsIFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
for ( ; rowFrame; rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW==rowFrame->GetStyleDisplay()->mDisplay) {
|
|
((nsTableRowFrame *)rowFrame)->SetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
rowIndex++;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void nsTableFrame::InsertColGroups(PRInt32 aStartColIndex,
|
|
nsIFrame* aFirstFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aLastFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex = aStartColIndex;
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* firstColGroupToReset = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = aFirstFrame;
|
|
PRBool didLastFrame = PR_FALSE;
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == kidFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
if (didLastFrame) {
|
|
firstColGroupToReset = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)kidFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)kidFrame;
|
|
cgFrame->SetStartColumnIndex(colIndex);
|
|
nsIFrame* firstCol = kidFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
cgFrame->AddColsToTable(colIndex, PR_FALSE, firstCol);
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = cgFrame->GetColCount();
|
|
colIndex += numCols;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (kidFrame == aLastFrame) {
|
|
didLastFrame = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (firstColGroupToReset) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame::ResetColIndices(firstColGroupToReset, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::InsertCol(nsTableColFrame& aColFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
mColFrames.InsertElementAt(&aColFrame, aColIndex);
|
|
nsTableColType insertedColType = aColFrame.GetColType();
|
|
PRInt32 numCacheCols = mColFrames.Count();
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
PRInt32 numMapCols = cellMap->GetColCount();
|
|
if (numCacheCols > numMapCols) {
|
|
PRBool removedFromCache = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell != insertedColType) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* lastCol = (nsTableColFrame *)mColFrames.ElementAt(numCacheCols - 1);
|
|
if (lastCol) {
|
|
nsTableColType lastColType = lastCol->GetColType();
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell == lastColType) {
|
|
// remove the col from the cache
|
|
mColFrames.RemoveElementAt(numCacheCols - 1);
|
|
// remove the col from the eColGroupAnonymousCell col group
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* lastColGroup = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)mColGroups.LastChild();
|
|
if (lastColGroup) {
|
|
lastColGroup->RemoveChild(*lastCol, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
// remove the col group if it is empty
|
|
if (lastColGroup->GetColCount() <= 0) {
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFrame((nsIFrame*)lastColGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
removedFromCache = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!removedFromCache) {
|
|
cellMap->AddColsAtEnd(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0, 0, PR_MAX(1, GetColCount()), PR_MAX(1, GetRowCount()));
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::RemoveCol(nsTableColGroupFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndex,
|
|
PRBool aRemoveFromCache,
|
|
PRBool aRemoveFromCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
if (aRemoveFromCache) {
|
|
mColFrames.RemoveElementAt(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aRemoveFromCellMap) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
CreateAnonymousColFrames(1, eColAnonymousCell, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0, 0, GetColCount(), GetRowCount());
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Get the cell map for this table frame. It is not always mCellMap.
|
|
* Only the firstInFlow has a legit cell map
|
|
*/
|
|
nsTableCellMap* nsTableFrame::GetCellMap() const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame* firstInFlow = (nsTableFrame *)GetFirstInFlow();
|
|
return firstInFlow->mCellMap;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be moved to nsCSSFrameConstructor
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::CreateAnonymousColGroupFrame(nsTableColGroupType aColGroupType)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIContent* colGroupContent = GetContent();
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nsIPresShell *shell = presContext->PresShell();
|
|
|
|
nsRefPtr<nsStyleContext> colGroupStyle;
|
|
colGroupStyle = shell->StyleSet()->ResolvePseudoStyleFor(colGroupContent,
|
|
nsCSSAnonBoxes::tableColGroup,
|
|
mStyleContext);
|
|
// Create a col group frame
|
|
nsIFrame* newFrame = NS_NewTableColGroupFrame(shell, colGroupStyle);
|
|
if (newFrame) {
|
|
((nsTableColGroupFrame *)newFrame)->SetColType(aColGroupType);
|
|
newFrame->Init(colGroupContent, this, nsnull);
|
|
}
|
|
return (nsTableColGroupFrame *)newFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CreateAnonymousColFrames(PRInt32 aNumColsToAdd,
|
|
nsTableColType aColType,
|
|
PRBool aDoAppend,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevColIn)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aColType != eColAnonymousCol, "Shouldn't happen");
|
|
|
|
// get the last col group frame
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroupFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild();
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
colGroupFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableColGroupType lastColGroupType = eColGroupContent;
|
|
nsTableColGroupType newColGroupType = eColGroupContent;
|
|
if (colGroupFrame) {
|
|
lastColGroupType = colGroupFrame->GetColType();
|
|
}
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell == aColType) {
|
|
if (eColGroupAnonymousCell != lastColGroupType) {
|
|
newColGroupType = eColGroupAnonymousCell;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "CreateAnonymousColFrames called incorrectly");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (eColGroupContent != newColGroupType) {
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex = (colGroupFrame) ? colGroupFrame->GetStartColumnIndex() + colGroupFrame->GetColCount()
|
|
: 0;
|
|
colGroupFrame = CreateAnonymousColGroupFrame(newColGroupType);
|
|
if (!colGroupFrame) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
mColGroups.AppendFrame(this, colGroupFrame); // add the new frame to the child list
|
|
colGroupFrame->SetStartColumnIndex(colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* prevCol = (aDoAppend) ? colGroupFrame->GetChildList().LastChild() : aPrevColIn;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* firstNewFrame;
|
|
CreateAnonymousColFrames(colGroupFrame, aNumColsToAdd, aColType,
|
|
PR_TRUE, prevCol, &firstNewFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be moved to nsCSSFrameConstructor
|
|
// Right now it only creates the col frames at the end
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CreateAnonymousColFrames(nsTableColGroupFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aNumColsToAdd,
|
|
nsTableColType aColType,
|
|
PRBool aAddToColGroupAndTable,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevFrameIn,
|
|
nsIFrame** aFirstNewFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aColGroupFrame, "null frame");
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aColType != eColAnonymousCol, "Shouldn't happen");
|
|
|
|
*aFirstNewFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* lastColFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nsIPresShell *shell = presContext->PresShell();
|
|
|
|
// Get the last col frame
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = aColGroupFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableColFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
lastColFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startIndex = mColFrames.Count();
|
|
PRInt32 lastIndex = startIndex + aNumColsToAdd - 1;
|
|
|
|
for (PRInt32 childX = startIndex; childX <= lastIndex; childX++) {
|
|
nsIContent* iContent;
|
|
nsRefPtr<nsStyleContext> styleContext;
|
|
nsStyleContext* parentStyleContext;
|
|
|
|
// all anonymous cols that we create here use a pseudo style context of the
|
|
// col group
|
|
iContent = aColGroupFrame->GetContent();
|
|
parentStyleContext = aColGroupFrame->GetStyleContext();
|
|
styleContext = shell->StyleSet()->ResolvePseudoStyleFor(iContent,
|
|
nsCSSAnonBoxes::tableCol,
|
|
parentStyleContext);
|
|
// ASSERTION to check for bug 54454 sneaking back in...
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iContent, "null content in CreateAnonymousColFrames");
|
|
|
|
// create the new col frame
|
|
nsIFrame* colFrame = NS_NewTableColFrame(shell, styleContext);
|
|
((nsTableColFrame *) colFrame)->SetColType(aColType);
|
|
colFrame->Init(iContent, aColGroupFrame, nsnull);
|
|
colFrame->SetInitialChildList(nsnull, nsnull);
|
|
|
|
// Add the col to the sibling chain
|
|
if (lastColFrame) {
|
|
lastColFrame->SetNextSibling(colFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
lastColFrame = colFrame;
|
|
if (childX == startIndex) {
|
|
*aFirstNewFrame = colFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (aAddToColGroupAndTable) {
|
|
nsFrameList& cols = aColGroupFrame->GetChildList();
|
|
// the chain already exists, now add it to the col group child list
|
|
if (!aPrevFrameIn) {
|
|
cols.AppendFrames(aColGroupFrame, *aFirstNewFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
// get the starting col index in the cache
|
|
PRInt32 startColIndex = aColGroupFrame->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
if (aPrevFrameIn) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame =
|
|
(nsTableColFrame*)nsTableFrame::GetFrameAtOrBefore((nsIFrame*) aColGroupFrame, aPrevFrameIn,
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableColFrame);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
startColIndex = colFrame->GetColIndex() + 1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
aColGroupFrame->AddColsToTable(startColIndex, PR_TRUE,
|
|
*aFirstNewFrame, lastColFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::MatchCellMapToColCache(nsTableCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
PRInt32 numColsInMap = GetColCount();
|
|
PRInt32 numColsInCache = mColFrames.Count();
|
|
PRInt32 numColsToAdd = numColsInMap - numColsInCache;
|
|
if (numColsToAdd > 0) {
|
|
// this sets the child list, updates the col cache and cell map
|
|
CreateAnonymousColFrames(numColsToAdd, eColAnonymousCell, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (numColsToAdd < 0) {
|
|
PRInt32 numColsNotRemoved = DestroyAnonymousColFrames(-numColsToAdd);
|
|
// if the cell map has fewer cols than the cache, correct it
|
|
if (numColsNotRemoved > 0) {
|
|
aCellMap->AddColsAtEnd(numColsNotRemoved);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (numColsToAdd && HasZeroColSpans()) {
|
|
SetNeedColSpanExpansion(PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (NeedColSpanExpansion()) {
|
|
// This flag can be set in two ways -- either by changing
|
|
// the number of columns (that happens in the block above),
|
|
// or by adding a cell with colspan="0" to the cellmap. To
|
|
// handle the latter case we need to explicitly check the
|
|
// flag here -- it may be set even if the number of columns
|
|
// did not change.
|
|
//
|
|
// @see nsCellMap::AppendCell
|
|
|
|
aCellMap->ExpandZeroColSpans();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DidResizeColumns()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!GetPrevInFlow(),
|
|
"should only be called on first-in-flow");
|
|
if (mBits.mResizedColumns)
|
|
return; // already marked
|
|
|
|
for (nsTableFrame *f = this; f;
|
|
f = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(f->GetNextInFlow()))
|
|
f->mBits.mResizedColumns = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendCell(nsTableCellFrame& aCellFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0,0,0,0);
|
|
cellMap->AppendCell(aCellFrame, aRowIndex, PR_TRUE, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::InsertCells(nsVoidArray& aCellFrames,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndexBefore)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0,0,0,0);
|
|
cellMap->InsertCells(aCellFrames, aRowIndex, aColIndexBefore, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this removes the frames from the col group and table, but not the cell map
|
|
PRInt32
|
|
nsTableFrame::DestroyAnonymousColFrames(PRInt32 aNumFrames)
|
|
{
|
|
// only remove cols that are of type eTypeAnonymous cell (they are at the end)
|
|
PRInt32 endIndex = mColFrames.Count() - 1;
|
|
PRInt32 startIndex = (endIndex - aNumFrames) + 1;
|
|
PRInt32 numColsRemoved = 0;
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = endIndex; colX >= startIndex; colX--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colX);
|
|
if (colFrame && (eColAnonymousCell == colFrame->GetColType())) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(colFrame->GetParent());
|
|
// remove the frame from the colgroup
|
|
cgFrame->RemoveChild(*colFrame, PR_FALSE);
|
|
// remove the frame from the cache, but not the cell map
|
|
RemoveCol(nsnull, colX, PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE);
|
|
numColsRemoved++;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return (aNumFrames - numColsRemoved);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::RemoveCell(nsTableCellFrame* aCellFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0,0,0,0);
|
|
cellMap->RemoveCell(aCellFrame, aRowIndex, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetStartRowIndex(nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex = 0;
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = orderedRowGroups[rgIndex];
|
|
if (rgFrame == &aRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = rgFrame->GetRowCount();
|
|
rowIndex += numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
return rowIndex;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
void nsTableFrame::AppendRows(nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
nsVoidArray& aRowFrames)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
PRInt32 absRowIndex = GetStartRowIndex(aRowGroupFrame) + aRowIndex;
|
|
InsertRows(aRowGroupFrame, aRowFrames, absRowIndex, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertRow(nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame& aRowFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRBool aConsiderSpans)
|
|
{
|
|
nsAutoVoidArray rows;
|
|
rows.AppendElement(&aRowFrame);
|
|
return InsertRows(aRowGroupFrame, rows, aRowIndex, aConsiderSpans);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
PRInt32
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertRows(nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsVoidArray& aRowFrames,
|
|
PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRBool aConsiderSpans)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowsBefore firstRow=%d \n", aRowIndex);
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 numColsToAdd = 0;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0,0,0,0);
|
|
PRInt32 origNumRows = cellMap->GetRowCount();
|
|
PRInt32 numNewRows = aRowFrames.Count();
|
|
cellMap->InsertRows(aRowGroupFrame, aRowFrames, aRowIndex, aConsiderSpans, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (aRowIndex < origNumRows) {
|
|
AdjustRowIndices(aRowIndex, numNewRows);
|
|
}
|
|
// assign the correct row indices to the new rows. If they were adjusted above
|
|
// it may not have been done correctly because each row is constructed with index 0
|
|
for (PRInt32 rowX = 0; rowX < numNewRows; rowX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = (nsTableRowFrame *) aRowFrames.ElementAt(rowX);
|
|
rowFrame->SetRowIndex(aRowIndex + rowX);
|
|
}
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowsAfter \n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
return numColsToAdd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
void nsTableFrame::RemoveRows(nsTableRowFrame& aFirstRowFrame,
|
|
PRInt32 aNumRowsToRemove,
|
|
PRBool aConsiderSpans)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef TBD_OPTIMIZATION
|
|
// decide if we need to rebalance. we have to do this here because the row group
|
|
// cannot do it when it gets the dirty reflow corresponding to the frame being destroyed
|
|
PRBool stopTelling = PR_FALSE;
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame = aFirstFrame.FirstChild(); (kidFrame && !stopAsking);
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
if (IS_TABLE_CELL(kidFrame->GetType())) {
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* cellFrame = (nsTableCellFrame*)kidFrame;
|
|
stopTelling = tableFrame->CellChangedWidth(*cellFrame, cellFrame->GetPass1MaxElementWidth(),
|
|
cellFrame->GetMaximumWidth(), PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// XXX need to consider what happens if there are cells that have rowspans
|
|
// into the deleted row. Need to consider moving rows if a rebalance doesn't happen
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 firstRowIndex = aFirstRowFrame.GetRowIndex();
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== removeRowsBefore firstRow=%d numRows=%d\n", firstRowIndex, aNumRowsToRemove);
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0,0,0,0);
|
|
cellMap->RemoveRows(firstRowIndex, aNumRowsToRemove, aConsiderSpans, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
AdjustRowIndices(firstRowIndex, -aNumRowsToRemove);
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== removeRowsAfter\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::AppendRowGroups(nsIFrame* aFirstRowGroupFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
if (aFirstRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
nsFrameList newList(aFirstRowGroupFrame);
|
|
InsertRowGroups(aFirstRowGroupFrame, newList.LastChild());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetRowGroupFrame(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aFrameTypeIn)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* rgFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIAtom* frameType = aFrameTypeIn;
|
|
if (!aFrameTypeIn) {
|
|
frameType = aFrame->GetType();
|
|
}
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == frameType) {
|
|
rgFrame = aFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::scrollFrame == frameType) {
|
|
nsIScrollableFrame* scrollable = nsnull;
|
|
nsresult rv = CallQueryInterface(aFrame, &scrollable);
|
|
if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv) && (scrollable)) {
|
|
nsIFrame* scrolledFrame = scrollable->GetScrolledFrame();
|
|
if (scrolledFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == scrolledFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
rgFrame = scrolledFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return (nsTableRowGroupFrame*)rgFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// collect the rows ancestors of aFrame
|
|
PRInt32
|
|
nsTableFrame::CollectRows(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsVoidArray& aCollection)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!aFrame) return 0;
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = 0;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(aFrame);
|
|
if (rgFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
aCollection.AppendElement(childFrame);
|
|
numRows++;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
numRows += CollectRows(childFrame, aCollection);
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertRowGroups(nsIFrame* aFirstRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aLastRowGroupFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowGroupsBefore\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
nsAutoVoidArray rows;
|
|
// Loop over the rowgroups and check if some of them are new, if they are
|
|
// insert cellmaps in the order that is predefined by OrderRowGroups,
|
|
PRUint32 rgIndex;
|
|
for (rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = aFirstRowGroupFrame;
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
|
|
if (orderedRowGroups[rgIndex] == rgFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* priorRG =
|
|
(0 == rgIndex) ? nsnull : orderedRowGroups[rgIndex - 1];
|
|
// create and add the cell map for the row group
|
|
cellMap->InsertGroupCellMap(*rgFrame, priorRG);
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (kidFrame == aLastRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
cellMap->Synchronize(this);
|
|
ResetRowIndices(aFirstRowGroupFrame, aLastRowGroupFrame);
|
|
|
|
//now that the cellmaps are reordered too insert the rows
|
|
for (rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = aFirstRowGroupFrame;
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
|
|
if (orderedRowGroups[rgIndex] == rgFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* priorRG =
|
|
(0 == rgIndex) ? nsnull : orderedRowGroups[rgIndex - 1];
|
|
// collect the new row frames in an array and add them to the table
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = CollectRows(kidFrame, rows);
|
|
if (numRows > 0) {
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex = 0;
|
|
if (priorRG) {
|
|
PRInt32 priorNumRows = priorRG->GetRowCount();
|
|
rowIndex = priorRG->GetStartRowIndex() + priorNumRows;
|
|
}
|
|
InsertRows(*rgFrame, rows, rowIndex, PR_TRUE);
|
|
rows.Clear();
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (kidFrame == aLastRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowGroupsAfter\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
// Child frame enumeration
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFirstChild(nsIAtom* aListName) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (aListName == nsGkAtoms::colGroupList) {
|
|
return mColGroups.FirstChild();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nsHTMLContainerFrame::GetFirstChild(aListName);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIAtom*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetAdditionalChildListName(PRInt32 aIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (aIndex == NS_TABLE_FRAME_COLGROUP_LIST_INDEX) {
|
|
return nsGkAtoms::colGroupList;
|
|
}
|
|
if (aIndex == NS_TABLE_FRAME_OVERFLOW_LIST_INDEX) {
|
|
return nsGkAtoms::overflowList;
|
|
}
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class nsDisplayTableBorderBackground : public nsDisplayItem {
|
|
public:
|
|
nsDisplayTableBorderBackground(nsTableFrame* aFrame) : nsDisplayItem(aFrame) {
|
|
MOZ_COUNT_CTOR(nsDisplayTableBorderBackground);
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef NS_BUILD_REFCNT_LOGGING
|
|
virtual ~nsDisplayTableBorderBackground() {
|
|
MOZ_COUNT_DTOR(nsDisplayTableBorderBackground);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
virtual void Paint(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder, nsIRenderingContext* aCtx,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect);
|
|
// With collapsed borders, parts of the collapsed border can extend outside
|
|
// the table frame, so allow this display element to blow out to our
|
|
// overflow rect.
|
|
virtual nsRect GetBounds(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder) {
|
|
return static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(mFrame)->GetOverflowRect() +
|
|
aBuilder->ToReferenceFrame(mFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
NS_DISPLAY_DECL_NAME("TableBorderBackground")
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsDisplayTableBorderBackground::Paint(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsIRenderingContext* aCtx, const nsRect& aDirtyRect)
|
|
{
|
|
static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(mFrame)->
|
|
PaintTableBorderBackground(*aCtx, aDirtyRect,
|
|
aBuilder->ToReferenceFrame(mFrame));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static PRInt32 GetTablePartRank(nsDisplayItem* aItem)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIAtom* type = aItem->GetUnderlyingFrame()->GetType();
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableFrame)
|
|
return 0;
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame)
|
|
return 1;
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame)
|
|
return 2;
|
|
return 3;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static PRBool CompareByTablePartRank(nsDisplayItem* aItem1, nsDisplayItem* aItem2,
|
|
void* aClosure)
|
|
{
|
|
return GetTablePartRank(aItem1) <= GetTablePartRank(aItem2);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */ nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::GenericTraversal(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder, nsFrame* aFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect, const nsDisplayListSet& aLists)
|
|
{
|
|
// This is similar to what nsContainerFrame::BuildDisplayListForNonBlockChildren
|
|
// does, except that we allow the children's background and borders to go
|
|
// in our BorderBackground list. This doesn't really affect background
|
|
// painting --- the children won't actually draw their own backgrounds
|
|
// because the nsTableFrame already drew them, unless a child has its own
|
|
// stacking context, in which case the child won't use its passed-in
|
|
// BorderBackground list anyway. It does affect cell borders though; this
|
|
// lets us get cell borders into the nsTableFrame's BorderBackground list.
|
|
nsIFrame* kid = aFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (kid) {
|
|
nsresult rv = aFrame->BuildDisplayListForChild(aBuilder, kid, aDirtyRect, aLists);
|
|
NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
|
|
kid = kid->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */ nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::DisplayGenericTablePart(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsFrame* aFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet& aLists,
|
|
PRBool aIsRoot,
|
|
DisplayGenericTablePartTraversal aTraversal)
|
|
{
|
|
nsDisplayList eventsBorderBackground;
|
|
// If we need to sort the event backgrounds, then we'll put descendants'
|
|
// display items into their own set of lists.
|
|
PRBool sortEventBackgrounds = aIsRoot && aBuilder->IsForEventDelivery();
|
|
nsDisplayListCollection separatedCollection;
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet* lists = sortEventBackgrounds ? &separatedCollection : &aLists;
|
|
|
|
// Create dedicated background display items per-frame when we're
|
|
// handling events.
|
|
// XXX how to handle collapsed borders?
|
|
if (aBuilder->IsForEventDelivery() &&
|
|
aFrame->IsVisibleForPainting(aBuilder)) {
|
|
nsresult rv = lists->BorderBackground()->AppendNewToTop(new (aBuilder)
|
|
nsDisplayBackground(aFrame));
|
|
NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsresult rv = aTraversal(aBuilder, aFrame, aDirtyRect, *lists);
|
|
NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
|
|
|
|
if (sortEventBackgrounds) {
|
|
// Ensure that the table frame event background goes before the
|
|
// table rowgroups event backgrounds, before the table row event backgrounds,
|
|
// before everything else (cells and their blocks)
|
|
separatedCollection.BorderBackground()->Sort(aBuilder, CompareByTablePartRank, nsnull);
|
|
separatedCollection.MoveTo(aLists);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return aFrame->DisplayOutline(aBuilder, aLists);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// table paint code is concerned primarily with borders and bg color
|
|
// SEC: TODO: adjust the rect for captions
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::BuildDisplayList(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet& aLists)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!IsVisibleInSelection(aBuilder))
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
|
|
DO_GLOBAL_REFLOW_COUNT_DSP_COLOR("nsTableFrame", NS_RGB(255,128,255));
|
|
|
|
// This background is created regardless of whether this frame is
|
|
// visible or not. Visibility decisions are delegated to the
|
|
// table background painter.
|
|
nsresult rv = aLists.BorderBackground()->AppendNewToTop(new (aBuilder)
|
|
nsDisplayTableBorderBackground(this));
|
|
NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
|
|
|
|
return DisplayGenericTablePart(aBuilder, this, aDirtyRect, aLists, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX We don't put the borders and backgrounds in tree order like we should.
|
|
// That requires some major surgery which we aren't going to do right now.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PaintTableBorderBackground(nsIRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
nsPoint aPt)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nsRect dirtyRect = aDirtyRect - aPt;
|
|
nsIRenderingContext::AutoPushTranslation
|
|
translate(&aRenderingContext, aPt.x, aPt.y);
|
|
|
|
TableBackgroundPainter painter(this, TableBackgroundPainter::eOrigin_Table,
|
|
presContext, aRenderingContext, dirtyRect);
|
|
nsresult rv;
|
|
|
|
if (eCompatibility_NavQuirks == presContext->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
nsMargin deflate(0,0,0,0);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
PRInt32 p2t = nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel();
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData =
|
|
(BCPropertyData*)nsTableFrame::GetProperty((nsIFrame*)this,
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty,
|
|
PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (propData) {
|
|
deflate.top = BC_BORDER_TOP_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mTopBorderWidth);
|
|
deflate.right = BC_BORDER_RIGHT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mRightBorderWidth);
|
|
deflate.bottom = BC_BORDER_BOTTOM_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBottomBorderWidth);
|
|
deflate.left = BC_BORDER_LEFT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mLeftBorderWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
rv = painter.PaintTable(this, &deflate);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv)) return;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
rv = painter.PaintTable(this, nsnull);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv)) return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (GetStyleVisibility()->IsVisible()) {
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* border = GetStyleBorder();
|
|
nsRect rect(0, 0, mRect.width, mRect.height);
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
PRIntn skipSides = GetSkipSides();
|
|
nsCSSRendering::PaintBorder(presContext, aRenderingContext, this,
|
|
dirtyRect, rect, *border, mStyleContext,
|
|
skipSides);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
PaintBCBorders(aRenderingContext, dirtyRect);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//null range means the whole thing
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetSelected(nsPresContext* aPresContext,
|
|
nsIDOMRange *aRange,
|
|
PRBool aSelected,
|
|
nsSpread aSpread)
|
|
{
|
|
#if 0
|
|
//traverse through children unselect tables
|
|
if ((aSpread == eSpreadDown)){
|
|
nsIFrame* kid = GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (kid) {
|
|
kid->SetSelected(nsnull, aSelected, eSpreadDown);
|
|
kid = kid->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
// Must call base class to set mSelected state and trigger repaint of frame
|
|
// Note that in current version, aRange and aSpread are ignored,
|
|
// only this frame is considered
|
|
nsFrame::SetSelected(aPresContext, aRange, aSelected, aSpread);
|
|
return NS_OK;//return nsFrame::SetSelected(aRange,aSelected,eSpreadNone);
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::ParentDisablesSelection() const //override default behavior
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool returnval;
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(GetSelected(&returnval)))
|
|
return PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (returnval)
|
|
return PR_TRUE;
|
|
return nsFrame::ParentDisablesSelection();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRIntn
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetSkipSides() const
|
|
{
|
|
PRIntn skip = 0;
|
|
// frame attribute was accounted for in nsHTMLTableElement::MapTableBorderInto
|
|
// account for pagination
|
|
if (nsnull != GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
skip |= 1 << NS_SIDE_TOP;
|
|
}
|
|
if (nsnull != GetNextInFlow()) {
|
|
skip |= 1 << NS_SIDE_BOTTOM;
|
|
}
|
|
return skip;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetColumnDimensions(nscoord aHeight,
|
|
const nsMargin& aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingX = GetCellSpacingX();
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingY = GetCellSpacingY();
|
|
nscoord colHeight = aHeight -= aBorderPadding.top + aBorderPadding.bottom +
|
|
2* cellSpacingY;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* colGroupFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild();
|
|
PRInt32 colX = 0;
|
|
nsPoint colGroupOrigin(aBorderPadding.left + cellSpacingX,
|
|
aBorderPadding.top + cellSpacingY);
|
|
while (nsnull != colGroupFrame) {
|
|
nscoord colGroupWidth = 0;
|
|
nsIFrame* colFrame = colGroupFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
nsPoint colOrigin(0,0);
|
|
while (nsnull != colFrame) {
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN ==
|
|
colFrame->GetStyleDisplay()->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(colX < GetColCount(), "invalid number of columns");
|
|
nscoord colWidth = GetColumnWidth(colX);
|
|
nsRect colRect(colOrigin.x, colOrigin.y, colWidth, colHeight);
|
|
colFrame->SetRect(colRect);
|
|
colOrigin.x += colWidth + cellSpacingX;
|
|
colGroupWidth += colWidth + cellSpacingX;
|
|
colX++;
|
|
}
|
|
colFrame = colFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
if (colGroupWidth) {
|
|
colGroupWidth -= cellSpacingX;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect colGroupRect(colGroupOrigin.x, colGroupOrigin.y, colGroupWidth, colHeight);
|
|
colGroupFrame->SetRect(colGroupRect);
|
|
colGroupFrame = colGroupFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
colGroupOrigin.x += colGroupWidth + cellSpacingX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SEC: TODO need to worry about continuing frames prev/next in flow for splitting across pages.
|
|
|
|
// XXX this could be made more general to handle row modifications that change the
|
|
// table height, but first we need to scrutinize every Invalidate
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ProcessRowInserted(nscoord aNewHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
SetRowInserted(PR_FALSE); // reset the bit that got us here
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
// find the row group containing the inserted row
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame, "Must have rgFrame here");
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
// find the row that was inserted first
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = (nsTableRowFrame*)childFrame;
|
|
if (rowFrame->IsFirstInserted()) {
|
|
rowFrame->SetFirstInserted(PR_FALSE);
|
|
// damage the table from the 1st row inserted to the end of the table
|
|
nscoord damageY = rgFrame->GetPosition().y + rowFrame->GetPosition().y;
|
|
nsRect damageRect(0, damageY, GetSize().width, aNewHeight - damageY);
|
|
|
|
Invalidate(damageRect);
|
|
// XXXbz didn't we do this up front? Why do we need to do it again?
|
|
SetRowInserted(PR_FALSE);
|
|
return; // found it, so leave
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::MarkIntrinsicWidthsDirty()
|
|
{
|
|
static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(GetFirstInFlow())->
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy->MarkIntrinsicWidthsDirty();
|
|
|
|
// XXXldb Call SetBCDamageArea?
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::MarkIntrinsicWidthsDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetMinWidth(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders())
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
return LayoutStrategy()->GetMinWidth(aRenderingContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetPrefWidth(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders())
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
return LayoutStrategy()->GetPrefWidth(aRenderingContext, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsIFrame::IntrinsicWidthOffsetData
|
|
nsTableFrame::IntrinsicWidthOffsets(nsIRenderingContext* aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
IntrinsicWidthOffsetData result =
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::IntrinsicWidthOffsets(aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
result.hPadding = 0;
|
|
result.hPctPadding = 0;
|
|
|
|
nsMargin outerBC = GetIncludedOuterBCBorder();
|
|
result.hBorder = outerBC.LeftRight();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsSize
|
|
nsTableFrame::ComputeSize(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
nsSize aCBSize, nscoord aAvailableWidth,
|
|
nsSize aMargin, nsSize aBorder, nsSize aPadding,
|
|
PRBool aShrinkWrap)
|
|
{
|
|
nsSize result =
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::ComputeSize(aRenderingContext, aCBSize,
|
|
aAvailableWidth,
|
|
aMargin, aBorder, aPadding, aShrinkWrap);
|
|
|
|
// Tables never shrink below their min width.
|
|
nscoord minWidth = GetMinWidth(aRenderingContext);
|
|
if (minWidth > result.width)
|
|
result.width = minWidth;
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::TableShrinkWidthToFit(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
nscoord aWidthInCB)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord result;
|
|
nscoord minWidth = GetMinWidth(aRenderingContext);
|
|
if (minWidth > aWidthInCB) {
|
|
result = minWidth;
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Tables shrink width to fit with a slightly different algorithm
|
|
// from the one they use for their intrinsic widths (the difference
|
|
// relates to handling of percentage widths on columns). So this
|
|
// function differs from nsFrame::ShrinkWidthToFit by only the
|
|
// following line.
|
|
// Since we've already called GetMinWidth, we don't need to do any
|
|
// of the other stuff GetPrefWidth does.
|
|
nscoord prefWidth =
|
|
LayoutStrategy()->GetPrefWidth(aRenderingContext, PR_TRUE);
|
|
if (prefWidth > aWidthInCB) {
|
|
result = aWidthInCB;
|
|
} else {
|
|
result = prefWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsSize
|
|
nsTableFrame::ComputeAutoSize(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
nsSize aCBSize, nscoord aAvailableWidth,
|
|
nsSize aMargin, nsSize aBorder, nsSize aPadding,
|
|
PRBool aShrinkWrap)
|
|
{
|
|
// Tables always shrink-wrap.
|
|
nscoord cbBased = aAvailableWidth - aMargin.width - aBorder.width -
|
|
aPadding.width;
|
|
return nsSize(TableShrinkWidthToFit(aRenderingContext, cbBased),
|
|
NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Return true if aParentReflowState.frame or any of its ancestors within
|
|
// the containing table have non-auto height. (e.g. pct or fixed height)
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::AncestorsHaveStyleHeight(const nsHTMLReflowState& aParentReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
for (const nsHTMLReflowState* rs = &aParentReflowState;
|
|
rs && rs->frame; rs = rs->parentReflowState) {
|
|
nsIAtom* frameType = rs->frame->GetType();
|
|
if (IS_TABLE_CELL(frameType) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == frameType) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == frameType)) {
|
|
if (rs->mStylePosition->mHeight.GetUnit() != eStyleUnit_Auto) {
|
|
return PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType) {
|
|
// we reached the containing table, so always return
|
|
if (rs->mStylePosition->mHeight.GetUnit() != eStyleUnit_Auto) {
|
|
return PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else return PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// See if a special height reflow needs to occur and if so, call RequestSpecialHeightReflow
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CheckRequestSpecialHeightReflow(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!aReflowState.frame->GetPrevInFlow() && // 1st in flow
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE == aReflowState.ComputedHeight() || // no computed height
|
|
0 == aReflowState.ComputedHeight()) &&
|
|
eStyleUnit_Percent == aReflowState.mStylePosition->mHeight.GetUnit() && // pct height
|
|
nsTableFrame::AncestorsHaveStyleHeight(*aReflowState.parentReflowState)) {
|
|
nsTableFrame::RequestSpecialHeightReflow(aReflowState);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Notify the frame and its ancestors (up to the containing table) that a special
|
|
// height reflow will occur. During a special height reflow, a table, row group,
|
|
// row, or cell returns the last size it was reflowed at. However, the table may
|
|
// change the height of row groups, rows, cells in DistributeHeightToRows after.
|
|
// And the row group can change the height of rows, cells in CalculateRowHeights.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RequestSpecialHeightReflow(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
// notify the frame and its ancestors of the special reflow, stopping at the containing table
|
|
for (const nsHTMLReflowState* rs = &aReflowState; rs && rs->frame; rs = rs->parentReflowState) {
|
|
nsIAtom* frameType = rs->frame->GetType();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IS_TABLE_CELL(frameType) ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == frameType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == frameType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::scrollFrame == frameType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType,
|
|
"unexpected frame type");
|
|
|
|
rs->frame->AddStateBits(NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_HEIGHT);
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rs != &aReflowState,
|
|
"should not request special height reflow for table");
|
|
// always stop when we reach a table
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/******************************************************************************************
|
|
* Before reflow, intrinsic width calculation is done using GetMinWidth
|
|
* and GetPrefWidth. This used to be known as pass 1 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* After the intrinsic width calculation, the table determines the
|
|
* column widths using BalanceColumnWidths() and
|
|
* then reflows each child again with a constrained avail width. This reflow is referred to
|
|
* as the pass 2 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* A special height reflow (pass 3 reflow) can occur during an initial or resize reflow
|
|
* if (a) a row group, row, cell, or a frame inside a cell has a percent height but no computed
|
|
* height or (b) in paginated mode, a table has a height. (a) supports percent nested tables
|
|
* contained inside cells whose heights aren't known until after the pass 2 reflow. (b) is
|
|
* necessary because the table cannot split until after the pass 2 reflow. The mechanics of
|
|
* the special height reflow (variety a) are as follows:
|
|
*
|
|
* 1) Each table related frame (table, row group, row, cell) implements NeedsSpecialReflow()
|
|
* to indicate that it should get the reflow. It does this when it has a percent height but
|
|
* no computed height by calling CheckRequestSpecialHeightReflow(). This method calls
|
|
* RequestSpecialHeightReflow() which calls SetNeedSpecialReflow() on its ancestors until
|
|
* it reaches the containing table and calls SetNeedToInitiateSpecialReflow() on it. For
|
|
* percent height frames inside cells, during DidReflow(), the cell's NotifyPercentHeight()
|
|
* is called (the cell is the reflow state's mPercentHeightObserver in this case).
|
|
* NotifyPercentHeight() calls RequestSpecialHeightReflow().
|
|
*
|
|
* 2) After the pass 2 reflow, if the table's NeedToInitiateSpecialReflow(true) was called, it
|
|
* will do the special height reflow, setting the reflow state's mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow
|
|
* to true and mSpecialHeightInitiator to itself. It won't do this if IsPrematureSpecialHeightReflow()
|
|
* returns true because in that case another special height reflow will be coming along with the
|
|
* containing table as the mSpecialHeightInitiator. It is only relevant to do the reflow when
|
|
* the mSpecialHeightInitiator is the containing table, because if it is a remote ancestor, then
|
|
* appropriate heights will not be known.
|
|
*
|
|
* 3) Since the heights of the table, row groups, rows, and cells was determined during the pass 2
|
|
* reflow, they return their last desired sizes during the special height reflow. The reflow only
|
|
* permits percent height frames inside the cells to resize based on the cells height and that height
|
|
* was determined during the pass 2 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* So, in the case of deeply nested tables, all of the tables that were told to initiate a special
|
|
* reflow will do so, but if a table is already in a special reflow, it won't inititate the reflow
|
|
* until the current initiator is its containing table. Since these reflows are only received by
|
|
* frames that need them and they don't cause any rebalancing of tables, the extra overhead is minimal.
|
|
*
|
|
* The type of special reflow that occurs during printing (variety b) follows the same mechanism except
|
|
* that all frames will receive the reflow even if they don't really need them.
|
|
*
|
|
* Open issues with the special height reflow:
|
|
*
|
|
* 1) At some point there should be 2 kinds of special height reflows because (a) and (b) above are
|
|
* really quite different. This would avoid unnecessary reflows during printing.
|
|
* 2) When a cell contains frames whose percent heights > 100%, there is data loss (see bug 115245).
|
|
* However, this can also occur if a cell has a fixed height and there is no special height reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* XXXldb Special height reflow should really be its own method, not
|
|
* part of nsIFrame::Reflow. It should then call nsIFrame::Reflow on
|
|
* the contents of the cells to do the necessary vertical resizing.
|
|
*
|
|
******************************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
/* Layout the entire inner table. */
|
|
NS_METHOD nsTableFrame::Reflow(nsPresContext* aPresContext,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus)
|
|
{
|
|
DO_GLOBAL_REFLOW_COUNT("nsTableFrame");
|
|
DISPLAY_REFLOW(aPresContext, this, aReflowState, aDesiredSize, aStatus);
|
|
PRBool isPaginated = aPresContext->IsPaginated();
|
|
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && !mTableLayoutStrategy) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "strategy should have been created in Init");
|
|
return NS_ERROR_NULL_POINTER;
|
|
}
|
|
nsresult rv = NS_OK;
|
|
|
|
// see if collapsing borders need to be calculated
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && IsBorderCollapse() && NeedToCalcBCBorders()) {
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.width = aReflowState.availableWidth;
|
|
|
|
// Check for an overflow list, and append any row group frames being pushed
|
|
MoveOverflowToChildList(aPresContext);
|
|
|
|
PRBool haveDesiredHeight = PR_FALSE;
|
|
PRBool reflowedChildren = PR_FALSE;
|
|
SetHaveReflowedColGroups(PR_FALSE);
|
|
|
|
if (aReflowState.ComputedHeight() != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE ||
|
|
// Also check mVResize, to handle the first Reflow preceding a
|
|
// special height Reflow, when we've already had a special height
|
|
// Reflow (where mComputedHeight would not be
|
|
// NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE, but without a style change in between).
|
|
aReflowState.mFlags.mVResize) {
|
|
// XXX Eventually, we should modify DistributeHeightToRows to use
|
|
// nsTableRowFrame::GetHeight instead of nsIFrame::GetSize().height.
|
|
// That way, it will make its calculations based on internal table
|
|
// frame heights as they are before they ever had any extra height
|
|
// distributed to them. In the meantime, this reflows all the
|
|
// internal table frames, which restores them to their state before
|
|
// DistributeHeightToRows was called.
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the entire table (pass 2 and possibly pass 3). This phase is necessary during a
|
|
// constrained initial reflow and other reflows which require either a strategy init or balance.
|
|
// This isn't done during an unconstrained reflow, because it will occur later when the parent
|
|
// reflows with a constrained width.
|
|
PRBool needToInitiateSpecialReflow =
|
|
!!(GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_HEIGHT);
|
|
if (NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(this) ||
|
|
aReflowState.ShouldReflowAllKids() ||
|
|
IsGeometryDirty() ||
|
|
needToInitiateSpecialReflow) {
|
|
// see if an extra reflow will be necessary in pagination mode when there is a specified table height
|
|
if (isPaginated && !GetPrevInFlow() && (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availableHeight)) {
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedHeight = CalcBorderBoxHeight(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((tableSpecifiedHeight > 0) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedHeight != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE)) {
|
|
needToInitiateSpecialReflow = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
nsIFrame* lastChildReflowed = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aReflowState.mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow,
|
|
"Shouldn't be in special height reflow here!");
|
|
|
|
// do the pass 2 reflow unless this is a special height reflow and we will be
|
|
// initiating a special height reflow
|
|
// XXXldb I changed this. Should I change it back?
|
|
|
|
// if we need to initiate a special height reflow, then don't constrain the
|
|
// height of the reflow before that
|
|
nscoord availHeight = needToInitiateSpecialReflow
|
|
? NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE : aReflowState.availableHeight;
|
|
|
|
ReflowTable(aDesiredSize, aReflowState, availHeight,
|
|
lastChildReflowed, aStatus);
|
|
reflowedChildren = PR_TRUE;
|
|
|
|
// reevaluate special height reflow conditions
|
|
if (GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_HEIGHT)
|
|
needToInitiateSpecialReflow = PR_TRUE;
|
|
|
|
// XXXldb Are all these conditions correct?
|
|
if (needToInitiateSpecialReflow && NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
// XXXldb Do we need to set the mVResize flag on any reflow states?
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState &mutable_rs =
|
|
const_cast<nsHTMLReflowState&>(aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// distribute extra vertical space to rows
|
|
CalcDesiredHeight(aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
mutable_rs.mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow = PR_TRUE;
|
|
// save the previous special height reflow initiator, install us as the new one
|
|
nsIFrame* specialReflowInitiator = aReflowState.mPercentHeightReflowInitiator;
|
|
mutable_rs.mPercentHeightReflowInitiator = this;
|
|
|
|
ReflowTable(aDesiredSize, aReflowState, aReflowState.availableHeight,
|
|
lastChildReflowed, aStatus);
|
|
// restore the previous special height reflow initiator
|
|
mutable_rs.mPercentHeightReflowInitiator = specialReflowInitiator;
|
|
|
|
if (lastChildReflowed && NS_FRAME_IS_NOT_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
// if there is an incomplete child, then set the desired height to include it but not the next one
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(&aReflowState);
|
|
aDesiredSize.height = borderPadding.bottom + GetCellSpacingY() +
|
|
lastChildReflowed->GetRect().YMost();
|
|
}
|
|
haveDesiredHeight = PR_TRUE;
|
|
reflowedChildren = PR_TRUE;
|
|
|
|
mutable_rs.mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.width = aReflowState.ComputedWidth() +
|
|
aReflowState.mComputedBorderPadding.LeftRight();
|
|
if (!haveDesiredHeight) {
|
|
CalcDesiredHeight(aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
}
|
|
if (IsRowInserted()) {
|
|
ProcessRowInserted(aDesiredSize.height);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(&aReflowState);
|
|
SetColumnDimensions(aDesiredSize.height, borderPadding);
|
|
if (NeedToCollapse() &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availableWidth)) {
|
|
AdjustForCollapsingRowsCols(aDesiredSize, borderPadding);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// make sure the table overflow area does include the table rect.
|
|
nsRect tableRect(0, 0, aDesiredSize.width, aDesiredSize.height) ;
|
|
|
|
if (!aReflowState.mStyleDisplay->IsTableClip()) {
|
|
// collapsed border may leak out
|
|
nsMargin bcMargin = GetExcludedOuterBCBorder();
|
|
tableRect.Inflate(bcMargin);
|
|
}
|
|
aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea.UnionRect(aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea, tableRect);
|
|
|
|
if (!reflowedChildren) {
|
|
// use the old overflow area
|
|
nsRect* oldOverflowArea = GetOverflowAreaProperty();
|
|
if (oldOverflowArea) {
|
|
aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea.UnionRect(aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea, *oldOverflowArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW) {
|
|
// Fulfill the promise InvalidateFrame makes.
|
|
Invalidate(aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
FinishAndStoreOverflow(&aDesiredSize);
|
|
NS_FRAME_SET_TRUNCATION(aStatus, aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowTable(nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nscoord aAvailHeight,
|
|
nsIFrame*& aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus)
|
|
{
|
|
nsresult rv = NS_OK;
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy->ComputeColumnWidths(aReflowState);
|
|
}
|
|
// Constrain our reflow width to the computed table width (of the 1st in flow).
|
|
// and our reflow height to our avail height minus border, padding, cellspacing
|
|
aDesiredSize.width = aReflowState.ComputedWidth() +
|
|
aReflowState.mComputedBorderPadding.LeftRight();
|
|
nsTableReflowState reflowState(*PresContext(), aReflowState, *this,
|
|
aDesiredSize.width, aAvailHeight);
|
|
ReflowChildren(reflowState, aStatus, aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea);
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aReflowState.rendContext);
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFirstBodyRowGroupFrame()
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* headerFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* footerFrame = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild(); nsnull != kidFrame; ) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* childDisplay = kidFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
// We expect the header and footer row group frames to be first, and we only
|
|
// allow one header and one footer
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
if (headerFrame) {
|
|
// We already have a header frame and so this header frame is treated
|
|
// like an ordinary body row group frame
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
headerFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
} else if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
if (footerFrame) {
|
|
// We already have a footer frame and so this footer frame is treated
|
|
// like an ordinary body row group frame
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
footerFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
} else if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next child
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Table specific version that takes into account repeated header and footer
|
|
// frames when continuing table frames
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PushChildren(const FrameArray& aFrames,
|
|
PRInt32 aPushFrom)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aPushFrom > 0, "pushing first child");
|
|
|
|
// extract the frames from the array into a sibling list
|
|
nsFrameList frames;
|
|
nsIFrame* lastFrame = nsnull;
|
|
PRUint32 childX;
|
|
nsIFrame* prevSiblingHint = aFrames.SafeElementAt(aPushFrom - 1);
|
|
for (childX = aPushFrom; childX < aFrames.Length(); ++childX) {
|
|
nsIFrame* f = aFrames[childX];
|
|
// Don't push repeatable frames, do push non-rowgroup frames.
|
|
// XXXbz Need to push the non-rowgroup frames, even though we don't reflow
|
|
// them, so that we don't lose them. Of course there shouldn't be any
|
|
// non-rowgroup frames here...
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(f);
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame, "Unexpected non-row-group frame");
|
|
if (!rgFrame || !rgFrame->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
mFrames.RemoveFrame(f, prevSiblingHint);
|
|
frames.InsertFrame(nsnull, lastFrame, f);
|
|
lastFrame = f;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (nsnull != GetNextInFlow()) {
|
|
nsTableFrame* nextInFlow = (nsTableFrame*)GetNextInFlow();
|
|
|
|
// Insert the frames after any repeated header and footer frames
|
|
nsIFrame* firstBodyFrame = nextInFlow->GetFirstBodyRowGroupFrame();
|
|
nsIFrame* prevSibling = nsnull;
|
|
if (firstBodyFrame) {
|
|
prevSibling = nextInFlow->mFrames.GetPrevSiblingFor(firstBodyFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
// When pushing and pulling frames we need to check for whether any
|
|
// views need to be reparented.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* f = frames.FirstChild(); f; f = f->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::ReparentFrameView(PresContext(), f, this, nextInFlow);
|
|
}
|
|
nextInFlow->mFrames.InsertFrames(GetNextInFlow(), prevSibling, frames.FirstChild());
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// Add the frames to our overflow list
|
|
SetOverflowFrames(PresContext(), frames.FirstChild());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Table specific version that takes into account header and footer row group
|
|
// frames that are repeated for continuing table frames
|
|
//
|
|
// Appends the overflow frames to the end of the child list, just like the
|
|
// nsContainerFrame version does, except that there are no assertions that
|
|
// the child list is empty (it may not be empty, because there may be repeated
|
|
// header/footer frames)
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::MoveOverflowToChildList(nsPresContext* aPresContext)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// Check for an overflow list with our prev-in-flow
|
|
nsTableFrame* prevInFlow = (nsTableFrame*)GetPrevInFlow();
|
|
if (prevInFlow) {
|
|
nsIFrame* prevOverflowFrames = prevInFlow->GetOverflowFrames(aPresContext, PR_TRUE);
|
|
if (prevOverflowFrames) {
|
|
// When pushing and pulling frames we need to check for whether any
|
|
// views need to be reparented.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* f = prevOverflowFrames; f; f = f->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
nsHTMLContainerFrame::ReparentFrameView(aPresContext, f, prevInFlow, this);
|
|
}
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrames(this, prevOverflowFrames);
|
|
result = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// It's also possible that we have an overflow list for ourselves
|
|
nsIFrame* overflowFrames = GetOverflowFrames(aPresContext, PR_TRUE);
|
|
if (overflowFrames) {
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrames(nsnull, overflowFrames);
|
|
result = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
// collapsing row groups, rows, col groups and cols are accounted for after both passes of
|
|
// reflow so that it has no effect on the calculations of reflow.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AdjustForCollapsingRowsCols(nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
nsMargin aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord yTotalOffset = 0; // total offset among all rows in all row groups
|
|
|
|
// reset the bit, it will be set again if row/rowgroup is collapsed
|
|
SetNeedToCollapse(PR_FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// collapse the rows and/or row groups as necessary
|
|
// Get the ordered children
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
nscoord width = GetCollapsedWidth(aBorderPadding);
|
|
nscoord rgWidth = width - 2 * GetCellSpacingX();
|
|
nsRect overflowArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
// Walk the list of children
|
|
for (PRUint32 childX = 0; childX < rowGroups.Length(); childX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[childX];
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame, "Must have row group frame here");
|
|
yTotalOffset += rgFrame->CollapseRowGroupIfNecessary(yTotalOffset, rgWidth);
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(overflowArea, rgFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.height -= yTotalOffset;
|
|
aDesiredSize.width = width;
|
|
overflowArea.UnionRect(nsRect(0, 0, aDesiredSize.width, aDesiredSize.height),
|
|
overflowArea);
|
|
FinishAndStoreOverflow(&overflowArea,
|
|
nsSize(aDesiredSize.width, aDesiredSize.height));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetCollapsedWidth(nsMargin aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingX = GetCellSpacingX();
|
|
nscoord width = cellSpacingX;
|
|
width += aBorderPadding.left + aBorderPadding.right;
|
|
for (nsIFrame* groupFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild(); groupFrame;
|
|
groupFrame = groupFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
const nsStyleVisibility* groupVis = groupFrame->GetStyleVisibility();
|
|
PRBool collapseGroup = (NS_STYLE_VISIBILITY_COLLAPSE == groupVis->mVisible);
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)groupFrame;
|
|
for (nsTableColFrame* colFrame = cgFrame->GetFirstColumn(); colFrame;
|
|
colFrame = colFrame->GetNextCol()) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* colDisplay = colFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
PRInt32 colX = colFrame->GetColIndex();
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN == colDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
const nsStyleVisibility* colVis = colFrame->GetStyleVisibility();
|
|
PRBool collapseCol = (NS_STYLE_VISIBILITY_COLLAPSE == colVis->mVisible);
|
|
PRInt32 colWidth = GetColumnWidth(colX);
|
|
if (!collapseGroup && !collapseCol) {
|
|
width += colWidth;
|
|
if (GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(colX) > 0)
|
|
width += cellSpacingX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return width;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendFrames(nsIAtom* aListName,
|
|
nsIFrame* aFrameList)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName || aListName == nsGkAtoms::colGroupList,
|
|
"unexpected child list");
|
|
|
|
// Because we actually have two child lists, one for col group frames and one
|
|
// for everything else, we need to look at each frame individually
|
|
// XXX The frame construction code should be separating out child frames
|
|
// based on the type, bug 343048.
|
|
nsIFrame* f = aFrameList;
|
|
while (f) {
|
|
// Get the next frame and disconnect this frame from its sibling
|
|
nsIFrame* next = f->GetNextSibling();
|
|
f->SetNextSibling(nsnull);
|
|
|
|
// See what kind of frame we have
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = f->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* lastColGroup;
|
|
PRBool doAppend = nsTableColGroupFrame::GetLastRealColGroup(this, (nsIFrame**) &lastColGroup);
|
|
PRInt32 startColIndex = (lastColGroup)
|
|
? lastColGroup->GetStartColumnIndex() + lastColGroup->GetColCount() : 0;
|
|
if (doAppend) {
|
|
// Append the new col group frame
|
|
mColGroups.AppendFrame(nsnull, f);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// there is a colgroup after the last real one
|
|
mColGroups.InsertFrame(nsnull, lastColGroup, f);
|
|
}
|
|
// Insert the colgroup and its cols into the table
|
|
InsertColGroups(startColIndex, f, f);
|
|
} else if (IsRowGroup(display->mDisplay)) {
|
|
// Append the new row group frame to the sibling chain
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrame(nsnull, f);
|
|
|
|
// insert the row group and its rows into the table
|
|
InsertRowGroups(f, f);
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Nothing special to do, just add the frame to our child list
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrame(nsnull, f);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Move to the next frame
|
|
f = next;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::AppendFrames\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertFrames(nsIAtom* aListName,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aFrameList)
|
|
{
|
|
// Asssume there's only one frame being inserted. The problem is that
|
|
// row group frames and col group frames go in separate child lists and
|
|
// so if there's more than one this gets messy...
|
|
// XXX The frame construction code should be separating out child frames
|
|
// based on the type, bug 343048.
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!aFrameList->GetNextSibling(), "expected only one child frame");
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aPrevFrame || aPrevFrame->GetParent() == this,
|
|
"inserting after sibling frame with different parent");
|
|
|
|
// See what kind of frame we have
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aFrameList->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
if (aPrevFrame) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* prevDisplay = aPrevFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
// Make sure they belong on the same frame list
|
|
if ((display->mDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP) !=
|
|
(prevDisplay->mDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP)) {
|
|
// the previous frame is not valid, see comment at ::AppendFrames
|
|
// XXXbz Using content indices here means XBL will get screwed
|
|
// over... Oh, well.
|
|
nsIFrame* pseudoFrame = aFrameList;
|
|
nsIContent* parentContent = GetContent();
|
|
nsIContent* content;
|
|
aPrevFrame = nsnull;
|
|
while (pseudoFrame && (parentContent ==
|
|
(content = pseudoFrame->GetContent()))) {
|
|
pseudoFrame = pseudoFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
}
|
|
nsCOMPtr<nsIContent> container = content->GetParent();
|
|
if (NS_LIKELY(container)) { // XXX need this null-check, see bug 411823.
|
|
PRInt32 newIndex = container->IndexOf(content);
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame;
|
|
PRBool isColGroup = (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP ==
|
|
display->mDisplay);
|
|
if (isColGroup) {
|
|
kidFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
}
|
|
// Important: need to start at a value smaller than all valid indices
|
|
PRInt32 lastIndex = -1;
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (isColGroup) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupType groupType =
|
|
((nsTableColGroupFrame *)kidFrame)->GetColType();
|
|
if (eColGroupAnonymousCell == groupType) {
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
pseudoFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
while (pseudoFrame && (parentContent ==
|
|
(content = pseudoFrame->GetContent()))) {
|
|
pseudoFrame = pseudoFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
}
|
|
PRInt32 index = container->IndexOf(content);
|
|
if (index > lastIndex && index < newIndex) {
|
|
lastIndex = index;
|
|
aPrevFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName || aListName == nsGkAtoms::colGroupList,
|
|
"unexpected child list");
|
|
// Insert the column group frame
|
|
nsFrameList frames(aFrameList); // convience for getting last frame
|
|
nsIFrame* lastFrame = frames.LastChild();
|
|
mColGroups.InsertFrame(nsnull, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
// find the starting col index for the first new col group
|
|
PRInt32 startColIndex = 0;
|
|
if (aPrevFrame) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* prevColGroup =
|
|
(nsTableColGroupFrame*)GetFrameAtOrBefore(this, aPrevFrame,
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame);
|
|
if (prevColGroup) {
|
|
startColIndex = prevColGroup->GetStartColumnIndex() + prevColGroup->GetColCount();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
InsertColGroups(startColIndex, aFrameList, lastFrame);
|
|
} else if (IsRowGroup(display->mDisplay)) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName, "unexpected child list");
|
|
nsFrameList newList(aFrameList);
|
|
nsIFrame* lastSibling = newList.LastChild();
|
|
// Insert the frames in the sibling chain
|
|
mFrames.InsertFrame(nsnull, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
|
|
InsertRowGroups(aFrameList, lastSibling);
|
|
} else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName, "unexpected child list");
|
|
// Just insert the frame and don't worry about reflowing it
|
|
mFrames.InsertFrame(nsnull, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::InsertFrames\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::RemoveFrame(nsIAtom* aListName,
|
|
nsIFrame* aOldFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
// See what kind of frame we have
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aOldFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
// XXX The frame construction code should be separating out child frames
|
|
// based on the type, bug 343048.
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName || aListName == nsGkAtoms::colGroupList,
|
|
"unexpected child list");
|
|
nsIFrame* nextColGroupFrame = aOldFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroup = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)aOldFrame;
|
|
PRInt32 firstColIndex = colGroup->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
PRInt32 lastColIndex = firstColIndex + colGroup->GetColCount() - 1;
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame::ResetColIndices(nextColGroupFrame, firstColIndex);
|
|
// remove the cols from the table
|
|
PRInt32 colX;
|
|
for (colX = lastColIndex; colX >= firstColIndex; colX--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = (nsTableColFrame*)mColFrames.SafeElementAt(colX);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
RemoveCol(colGroup, colX, PR_TRUE, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 numAnonymousColsToAdd = GetColCount() - mColFrames.Count();
|
|
if (numAnonymousColsToAdd > 0) {
|
|
// this sets the child list, updates the col cache and cell map
|
|
CreateAnonymousColFrames(numAnonymousColsToAdd,
|
|
eColAnonymousCell, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aListName, "unexpected child list");
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
if (rgFrame) {
|
|
// remove the row group from the cell map
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
cellMap->RemoveGroupCellMap(rgFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// remove the row group frame from the sibling chain
|
|
mFrames.DestroyFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
|
|
// XXXldb [reflow branch merging 20060830] do we still need this?
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
cellMap->Synchronize(this);
|
|
ResetRowIndices();
|
|
nsRect damageArea;
|
|
cellMap->RebuildConsideringCells(nsnull, nsnull, 0, 0, PR_FALSE, damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Just remove the frame
|
|
mFrames.DestroyFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
// XXXldb [reflow branch merging 20060830] do we still need this?
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsRect damageArea(0, 0, PR_MAX(1, GetColCount()), PR_MAX(1, GetRowCount()));
|
|
SetBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::RemoveFrame\n");
|
|
Dump(PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE, PR_TRUE);
|
|
#endif
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetUsedBorder() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return nsHTMLContainerFrame::GetUsedBorder();
|
|
|
|
return GetIncludedOuterBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetUsedPadding() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return nsHTMLContainerFrame::GetUsedPadding();
|
|
|
|
return nsMargin(0,0,0,0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(nscoord aPixelSize,
|
|
nscoord& aSmallHalf,
|
|
nscoord& aLargeHalf)
|
|
{
|
|
aSmallHalf = aPixelSize / 2;
|
|
aLargeHalf = aPixelSize - aSmallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetOuterBCBorder() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders())
|
|
const_cast<nsTableFrame*>(this)->CalcBCBorders();
|
|
|
|
nsMargin border(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
PRInt32 p2t = nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel();
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData =
|
|
(BCPropertyData*)nsTableFrame::GetProperty((nsIFrame*)this, nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (propData) {
|
|
border.top += BC_BORDER_TOP_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mTopBorderWidth);
|
|
border.right += BC_BORDER_RIGHT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mRightBorderWidth);
|
|
border.bottom += BC_BORDER_BOTTOM_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBottomBorderWidth);
|
|
border.left += BC_BORDER_LEFT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mLeftBorderWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetIncludedOuterBCBorder() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (eCompatibility_NavQuirks == PresContext()->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
return GetOuterBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
nsMargin border(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetExcludedOuterBCBorder() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (eCompatibility_NavQuirks != PresContext()->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
return GetOuterBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
nsMargin border(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
static
|
|
void GetSeparateModelBorderPadding(const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState,
|
|
nsStyleContext& aStyleContext,
|
|
nsMargin& aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
// XXXbz Either we _do_ have a reflow state and then we can use its
|
|
// mComputedBorderPadding or we don't and then we get the padding
|
|
// wrong!
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* border = aStyleContext.GetStyleBorder();
|
|
aBorderPadding = border->GetBorder();
|
|
if (aReflowState) {
|
|
aBorderPadding += aReflowState->mComputedPadding;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetChildAreaOffset(const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsMargin offset(0,0,0,0);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
if (eCompatibility_NavQuirks == presContext->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
nsTableFrame* firstInFlow = (nsTableFrame*)GetFirstInFlow(); if (!firstInFlow) ABORT1(offset);
|
|
PRInt32 p2t = nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel();
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData =
|
|
(BCPropertyData*)nsTableFrame::GetProperty((nsIFrame*)firstInFlow, nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (!propData) ABORT1(offset);
|
|
|
|
offset.top += BC_BORDER_TOP_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mTopBorderWidth);
|
|
offset.right += BC_BORDER_RIGHT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mRightBorderWidth);
|
|
offset.bottom += BC_BORDER_BOTTOM_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBottomBorderWidth);
|
|
offset.left += BC_BORDER_LEFT_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mLeftBorderWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
GetSeparateModelBorderPadding(aReflowState, *mStyleContext, offset);
|
|
}
|
|
return offset;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetContentAreaOffset(const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsMargin offset(0,0,0,0);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
// LDB: This used to unconditionally include the inner half as well,
|
|
// but that's pretty clearly wrong per the CSS2.1 spec.
|
|
offset = GetOuterBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
GetSeparateModelBorderPadding(aReflowState, *mStyleContext, offset);
|
|
}
|
|
return offset;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InitChildReflowState(nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
nsMargin collapseBorder;
|
|
nsMargin padding(0,0,0,0);
|
|
nsMargin* pCollapseBorder = nsnull;
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(aReflowState.frame);
|
|
if (rgFrame) {
|
|
pCollapseBorder = rgFrame->GetBCBorderWidth(collapseBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.Init(presContext, -1, -1, pCollapseBorder, &padding);
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!mBits.mResizedColumns ||
|
|
!aReflowState.parentReflowState->mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow,
|
|
"should not resize columns on special height reflow");
|
|
if (mBits.mResizedColumns) {
|
|
aReflowState.mFlags.mHResize = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Position and size aKidFrame and update our reflow state. The origin of
|
|
// aKidRect is relative to the upper-left origin of our frame
|
|
void nsTableFrame::PlaceChild(nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsIFrame* aKidFrame,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aKidDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsRect& aOriginalKidRect)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool isFirstReflow =
|
|
(aKidFrame->GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW) != 0;
|
|
|
|
// Place and size the child
|
|
FinishReflowChild(aKidFrame, PresContext(), nsnull, aKidDesiredSize,
|
|
aReflowState.x, aReflowState.y, 0);
|
|
|
|
InvalidateFrame(aKidFrame, aOriginalKidRect, isFirstReflow);
|
|
|
|
// Adjust the running y-offset
|
|
aReflowState.y += aKidDesiredSize.height;
|
|
|
|
// If our height is constrained, then update the available height
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.height) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.height -= aKidDesiredSize.height;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::OrderRowGroups(RowGroupArray& aChildren) const
|
|
{
|
|
aChildren.Clear();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* head = nsnull;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* foot = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* kidDisplay = kidFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowGroup = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (NS_LIKELY(rowGroup)) {
|
|
switch(kidDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP:
|
|
if (head) { // treat additional thead like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
head = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP:
|
|
if (foot) { // treat additional tfoot like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
foot = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW_GROUP:
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
break;
|
|
default:
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("How did this produce an nsTableRowGroupFrame?");
|
|
// Just ignore it
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// put the thead first
|
|
if (head) {
|
|
aChildren.InsertElementAt(0, head);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// put the tfoot after the last tbody
|
|
if (foot) {
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(foot);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRUint32
|
|
nsTableFrame::OrderRowGroups(FrameArray& aChildren,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame** aHead,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame** aFoot) const
|
|
{
|
|
aChildren.Clear();
|
|
// initialize out parameters
|
|
*aHead = nsnull;
|
|
*aFoot = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
FrameArray nonRowGroups;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* head = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* foot = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* kidDisplay = kidFrame->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowGroup = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (NS_LIKELY(rowGroup)) {
|
|
switch(kidDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP:
|
|
if (head) { // treat additional thead like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
head = kidFrame;
|
|
*aHead = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP:
|
|
if (foot) { // treat additional tfoot like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
foot = kidFrame;
|
|
*aFoot = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW_GROUP:
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(kidFrame);
|
|
break;
|
|
default:
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
} else {
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("Non-row-group primary frame list child of an "
|
|
"nsTableFrame? How come?");
|
|
nonRowGroups.AppendElement(kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// put the thead first
|
|
if (head) {
|
|
aChildren.InsertElementAt(0, head);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// put the tfoot after the last tbody
|
|
if (foot) {
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(foot);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRUint32 rowGroupCount = aChildren.Length();
|
|
aChildren.AppendElements(nonRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
return rowGroupCount;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTHead() const
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (kidFrame->GetStyleDisplay()->mDisplay ==
|
|
NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (rg) {
|
|
return rg;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTFoot() const
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (kidFrame->GetStyleDisplay()->mDisplay ==
|
|
NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (rg) {
|
|
return rg;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
IsRepeatable(nscoord aFrameHeight, nscoord aPageHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
return aFrameHeight < (aPageHeight / 4);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetupHeaderFooterChild(const nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nscoord* aDesiredHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nscoord pageHeight = presContext->GetPageSize().height;
|
|
|
|
if (aFrame->GetParent() != this || pageHeight == NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE) {
|
|
// Must be a scrollable head/footer (we don't allow those to repeat), or
|
|
// page has unconstrained height for some reason.
|
|
*aDesiredHeight = 0;
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the child with unconstrainted height
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState kidReflowState(presContext, aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
aFrame,
|
|
nsSize(aReflowState.availSize.width, NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE),
|
|
-1, -1, PR_FALSE);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(kidReflowState);
|
|
kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage = PR_TRUE;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize;
|
|
desiredSize.width = desiredSize.height = 0;
|
|
nsReflowStatus status;
|
|
nsresult rv = ReflowChild(aFrame, presContext, desiredSize, kidReflowState,
|
|
aReflowState.x, aReflowState.y, 0, status);
|
|
NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
|
|
// The child will be reflowed again "for real" so no need to place it now
|
|
|
|
aFrame->SetRepeatable(IsRepeatable(desiredSize.height, pageHeight));
|
|
*aDesiredHeight = desiredSize.height;
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the children based on the avail size and reason in aReflowState
|
|
// update aReflowMetrics a aStatus
|
|
NS_METHOD
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowChildren(nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus,
|
|
nsIFrame*& aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
nsRect& aOverflowArea)
|
|
{
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* prevKidFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsresult rv = NS_OK;
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingY = GetCellSpacingY();
|
|
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
// XXXldb Should we be checking constrained height instead?
|
|
PRBool isPaginated = presContext->IsPaginated();
|
|
|
|
aOverflowArea = nsRect (0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
|
|
PRBool reflowAllKids = aReflowState.reflowState.ShouldReflowAllKids() ||
|
|
mBits.mResizedColumns ||
|
|
IsGeometryDirty();
|
|
|
|
FrameArray rowGroups;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame *thead, *tfoot;
|
|
PRUint32 numRowGroups = OrderRowGroups(rowGroups, &thead, &tfoot);
|
|
PRBool pageBreak = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nscoord footerHeight = 0;
|
|
|
|
// Determine the repeatablility of headers and footers, and also the desired
|
|
// height of any repeatable footer.
|
|
// The repeatability of headers on continued tables is handled
|
|
// when they are created in nsCSSFrameConstructor::CreateContinuingTableFrame.
|
|
// We handle the repeatability of footers again here because we need to
|
|
// determine the footer's height anyway. We could perhaps optimize by
|
|
// using the footer's prev-in-flow's height instead of reflowing it again,
|
|
// but there's no real need.
|
|
if (isPaginated) {
|
|
if (thead && !GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
nscoord desiredHeight;
|
|
rv = SetupHeaderFooterChild(aReflowState, thead, &desiredHeight);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv))
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
if (tfoot) {
|
|
rv = SetupHeaderFooterChild(aReflowState, tfoot, &footerHeight);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv))
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
for (PRUint32 childX = 0; childX < numRowGroups; childX++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = rowGroups[childX];
|
|
// Get the frame state bits
|
|
// See if we should only reflow the dirty child frames
|
|
if (reflowAllKids ||
|
|
NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(kidFrame) ||
|
|
(aReflowState.reflowState.mFlags.mSpecialHeightReflow &&
|
|
(isPaginated || (kidFrame->GetStateBits() &
|
|
NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_HEIGHT)))) {
|
|
if (pageBreak) {
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX);
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsSize kidAvailSize(aReflowState.availSize);
|
|
// if the child is a tbody in paginated mode reduce the height by a repeated footer
|
|
PRBool allowRepeatedFooter = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (isPaginated && (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidAvailSize.height)) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* kidRG = GetRowGroupFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (kidRG != thead && kidRG != tfoot && tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
// the child is a tbody and there is a repeatable footer
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(tfoot == rowGroups[rowGroups.Length() - 1], "Missing footer!");
|
|
if (footerHeight + cellSpacingY < kidAvailSize.height) {
|
|
allowRepeatedFooter = PR_TRUE;
|
|
kidAvailSize.height -= footerHeight + cellSpacingY;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect oldKidRect = kidFrame->GetRect();
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize;
|
|
desiredSize.width = desiredSize.height = 0;
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the child into the available space
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState kidReflowState(presContext, aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
kidFrame, kidAvailSize,
|
|
-1, -1, PR_FALSE);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(kidReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// If this isn't the first row group, then we can't be at the top of the page
|
|
// When a new page starts, a head row group may be added automatically.
|
|
// We also consider the row groups just after the head as the top of the page.
|
|
// That is to prevent the infinite loop in some circumstance. See bug 344883.
|
|
if (childX > (thead ? 1 : 0)) {
|
|
kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.y += cellSpacingY;
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.height) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.height -= cellSpacingY;
|
|
}
|
|
// record the presence of a next in flow, it might get destroyed so we
|
|
// need to reorder the row group array
|
|
nsIFrame* kidNextInFlow = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
PRBool reorder = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (kidFrame->GetNextInFlow())
|
|
reorder = PR_TRUE;
|
|
|
|
rv = ReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, desiredSize, kidReflowState,
|
|
aReflowState.x, aReflowState.y,
|
|
NS_FRAME_INVALIDATE_ON_MOVE, aStatus);
|
|
|
|
if (reorder) {
|
|
// reorder row groups the reflow may have changed the nextinflows
|
|
numRowGroups = OrderRowGroups(rowGroups, &thead, &tfoot);
|
|
childX = rowGroups.IndexOf(kidFrame);
|
|
if (childX == RowGroupArray::NoIndex) {
|
|
// XXXbz can this happen?
|
|
childX = numRowGroups;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the rowgroup did not fit on this page might be pushed on
|
|
// the next page
|
|
if (NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus) && isPaginated &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidReflowState.availableHeight) &&
|
|
kidReflowState.availableHeight < desiredSize.height) {
|
|
// if we are on top of the page place with dataloss
|
|
if (kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage) {
|
|
if (childX+1 < rowGroups.Length()) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nextRowGroupFrame = rowGroups[childX + 1];
|
|
if (nextRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, kidFrame, desiredSize, oldKidRect);
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX + 1);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = kidFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // we are not on top, push this rowgroup onto the next page
|
|
if (prevKidFrame) { // we had a rowgroup before so push this
|
|
// XXXroc shouldn't we add a repeated footer here?
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = prevKidFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
pageBreak = PR_FALSE;
|
|
// see if there is a page break after this row group or before the next one
|
|
if (NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus) && isPaginated &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidReflowState.availableHeight)) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nextKid =
|
|
(childX + 1 < numRowGroups) ? rowGroups[childX + 1] : nsnull;
|
|
pageBreak = PageBreakAfter(*kidFrame, nextKid);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Place the child
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, kidFrame, desiredSize, oldKidRect);
|
|
|
|
// Remember where we just were in case we end up pushing children
|
|
prevKidFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
// Special handling for incomplete children
|
|
if (NS_FRAME_IS_NOT_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
kidNextInFlow = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
if (!kidNextInFlow) {
|
|
// The child doesn't have a next-in-flow so create a continuing
|
|
// frame. This hooks the child into the flow
|
|
nsIFrame* continuingFrame;
|
|
|
|
rv = presContext->PresShell()->FrameConstructor()->
|
|
CreateContinuingFrame(presContext, kidFrame, this,
|
|
&continuingFrame);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv)) {
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Add the continuing frame to the sibling list
|
|
continuingFrame->SetNextSibling(kidFrame->GetNextSibling());
|
|
kidFrame->SetNextSibling(continuingFrame);
|
|
// Update rowGroups with the new rowgroup, just as it
|
|
// would have been if we had called OrderRowGroups
|
|
// again. Note that rowGroups doesn't get used again after
|
|
// we PushChildren below, anyway.
|
|
rowGroups.InsertElementAt(childX + 1, continuingFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// put the nextinflow so that it will get pushed
|
|
rowGroups.InsertElementAt(childX + 1, kidNextInFlow);
|
|
}
|
|
// We've used up all of our available space so push the remaining
|
|
// children to the next-in-flow
|
|
nsIFrame* nextSibling = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (nsnull != nextSibling) {
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
kidAvailSize.height = footerHeight;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState footerReflowState(presContext,
|
|
aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
tfoot, kidAvailSize,
|
|
-1, -1, PR_FALSE);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(footerReflowState);
|
|
aReflowState.y += cellSpacingY;
|
|
|
|
nsRect origTfootRect = tfoot->GetRect();
|
|
|
|
nsReflowStatus footerStatus;
|
|
rv = ReflowChild(tfoot, presContext, desiredSize, footerReflowState,
|
|
aReflowState.x, aReflowState.y,
|
|
NS_FRAME_INVALIDATE_ON_MOVE, footerStatus);
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, tfoot, desiredSize, origTfootRect);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // it isn't being reflowed
|
|
aReflowState.y += cellSpacingY;
|
|
nsRect kidRect = kidFrame->GetRect();
|
|
if (kidRect.y != aReflowState.y) {
|
|
// invalidate the old position
|
|
kidFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
kidRect.y = aReflowState.y;
|
|
kidFrame->SetRect(kidRect); // move to the new position
|
|
RePositionViews(kidFrame);
|
|
// invalidate the new position
|
|
kidFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.y += kidRect.height;
|
|
|
|
// If our height is constrained then update the available height.
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.height) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.height -= cellSpacingY + kidRect.height;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(aOverflowArea, kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// We've now propagated the column resizes and geometry changes to all
|
|
// the children.
|
|
mBits.mResizedColumns = PR_FALSE;
|
|
ClearGeometryDirty();
|
|
|
|
return rv;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowColGroups(nsIRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && !HaveReflowedColGroups()) {
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics kidMet;
|
|
nsPresContext *presContext = PresContext();
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild(); kidFrame;
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
if (NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(kidFrame)) {
|
|
// The column groups don't care about dimensions or reflow states.
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState kidReflowState(presContext, kidFrame,
|
|
aRenderingContext, nsSize(0,0));
|
|
nsReflowStatus cgStatus;
|
|
ReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, kidMet, kidReflowState, 0, 0, 0,
|
|
cgStatus);
|
|
FinishReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, nsnull, kidMet, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
SetHaveReflowedColGroups(PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcDesiredHeight(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState, nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "never ever call me until the cell map is built!");
|
|
aDesiredSize.height = 0;
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingY = GetCellSpacingY();
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(&aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// get the natural height based on the last child's (row group or scroll frame) rect
|
|
FrameArray rowGroups;
|
|
PRUint32 numRowGroups;
|
|
{
|
|
// Scope for the dummies so we don't use them by accident
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame *dummy1, *dummy2;
|
|
numRowGroups = OrderRowGroups(rowGroups, &dummy1, &dummy2);
|
|
}
|
|
if (numRowGroups == 0) {
|
|
// tables can be used as rectangular items without content
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedHeight = CalcBorderBoxHeight(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != tableSpecifiedHeight) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedHeight > 0) &&
|
|
eCompatibility_NavQuirks != PresContext()->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
// empty tables should not have a size in quirks mode
|
|
aDesiredSize.height = tableSpecifiedHeight;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
aDesiredSize.height = 0;
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
PRInt32 rowCount = cellMap->GetRowCount();
|
|
PRInt32 colCount = cellMap->GetColCount();
|
|
nscoord desiredHeight = borderPadding.top + borderPadding.bottom;
|
|
if (rowCount > 0 && colCount > 0) {
|
|
desiredHeight += cellSpacingY;
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < numRowGroups; rgX++) {
|
|
desiredHeight += rowGroups[rgX]->GetSize().height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// see if a specified table height requires dividing additional space to rows
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedHeight = CalcBorderBoxHeight(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((tableSpecifiedHeight > 0) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedHeight != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedHeight > desiredHeight)) {
|
|
// proportionately distribute the excess height to unconstrained rows in each
|
|
// unconstrained row group.
|
|
DistributeHeightToRows(aReflowState, tableSpecifiedHeight - desiredHeight);
|
|
// this might have changed the overflow area incorporate the childframe overflow area.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild(); kidFrame; kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(aDesiredSize.mOverflowArea, kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
desiredHeight = tableSpecifiedHeight;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
aDesiredSize.height = desiredHeight;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
void ResizeCells(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
aTableFrame.OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics tableDesiredSize;
|
|
nsRect tableRect = aTableFrame.GetRect();
|
|
tableDesiredSize.width = tableRect.width;
|
|
tableDesiredSize.height = tableRect.height;
|
|
tableDesiredSize.mOverflowArea = nsRect(0, 0, tableRect.width,
|
|
tableRect.height);
|
|
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
|
|
nsRect rowGroupRect = rgFrame->GetRect();
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics groupDesiredSize;
|
|
groupDesiredSize.width = rowGroupRect.width;
|
|
groupDesiredSize.height = rowGroupRect.height;
|
|
groupDesiredSize.mOverflowArea = nsRect(0, 0, groupDesiredSize.width,
|
|
groupDesiredSize.height);
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
rgFrame->ConsiderChildOverflow(groupDesiredSize.mOverflowArea, rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
rgFrame->FinishAndStoreOverflow(&groupDesiredSize.mOverflowArea,
|
|
nsSize(groupDesiredSize.width, groupDesiredSize.height));
|
|
// make the coordinates of |desiredSize.mOverflowArea| incorrect
|
|
// since it's about to go away:
|
|
groupDesiredSize.mOverflowArea.MoveBy(rgFrame->GetPosition());
|
|
tableDesiredSize.mOverflowArea.UnionRect(tableDesiredSize.mOverflowArea, groupDesiredSize.mOverflowArea);
|
|
}
|
|
aTableFrame.FinishAndStoreOverflow(&tableDesiredSize.mOverflowArea,
|
|
nsSize(tableDesiredSize.width, tableDesiredSize.height));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DistributeHeightToRows(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nscoord aAmount)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingY = GetCellSpacingY();
|
|
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(&aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
nscoord amountUsed = 0;
|
|
// distribute space to each pct height row whose row group doesn't have a computed
|
|
// height, and base the pct on the table height. If the row group had a computed
|
|
// height, then this was already done in nsTableRowGroupFrame::CalculateRowHeights
|
|
nscoord pctBasis = aReflowState.ComputedHeight() - (GetCellSpacingY() * (GetRowCount() + 1));
|
|
nscoord yOriginRG = borderPadding.top + GetCellSpacingY();
|
|
nscoord yEndRG = yOriginRG;
|
|
PRUint32 rgX;
|
|
for (rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
nscoord amountUsedByRG = 0;
|
|
nscoord yOriginRow = 0;
|
|
nsRect rgRect = rgFrame->GetRect();
|
|
if (!rgFrame->HasStyleHeight()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
nsRect rowRect = rowFrame->GetRect();
|
|
if ((amountUsed < aAmount) && rowFrame->HasPctHeight()) {
|
|
nscoord pctHeight = rowFrame->GetHeight(pctBasis);
|
|
nscoord amountForRow = PR_MIN(aAmount - amountUsed, pctHeight - rowRect.height);
|
|
if (amountForRow > 0) {
|
|
nsRect oldRowRect = rowRect;
|
|
rowRect.height += amountForRow;
|
|
// XXXbz we don't need to change rowRect.y to be yOriginRow?
|
|
rowFrame->SetRect(rowRect);
|
|
yOriginRow += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
yEndRG += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
amountUsed += amountForRow;
|
|
amountUsedByRG += amountForRow;
|
|
//rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateRectDifference(oldRowRect, rowRect);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0 && yOriginRow != rowRect.y &&
|
|
!(GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW)) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
rowFrame->SetPosition(nsPoint(rowRect.x, yOriginRow));
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
yOriginRow += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
yEndRG += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0) {
|
|
if (rgRect.y != yOriginRG) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect origRgRect = rgRect;
|
|
|
|
rgRect.y = yOriginRG;
|
|
rgRect.height += amountUsedByRG;
|
|
|
|
rgFrame->SetRect(rgRect);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateFrame(rgFrame, origRgRect, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (amountUsed > 0 && yOriginRG != rgFrame->GetPosition().y) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame->GetPosition().x == 0, "Unexpected position");
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
rgFrame->SetPosition(nsPoint(0, yOriginRG));
|
|
// Make sure child views are properly positioned
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rgFrame);
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
yOriginRG = yEndRG;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (amountUsed >= aAmount) {
|
|
ResizeCells(*this);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// get the first row without a style height where its row group has an
|
|
// unconstrained height
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* firstUnStyledRG = nsnull;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstUnStyledRow = nsnull;
|
|
for (rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length() && !firstUnStyledRG; rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
if (!rgFrame->HasStyleHeight()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (!rowFrame->HasStyleHeight()) {
|
|
firstUnStyledRG = rgFrame;
|
|
firstUnStyledRow = rowFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* lastEligibleRow = nsnull;
|
|
// Accumulate the correct divisor. This will be the total total height of all
|
|
// unstyled rows inside unstyled row groups, unless there are none, in which
|
|
// case, it will be number of all rows. If the unstyled rows don't have a
|
|
// height, divide the space equally among them.
|
|
nscoord divisor = 0;
|
|
PRInt32 eligibleRows = 0;
|
|
PRBool expandEmptyRows = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRow) {
|
|
// there is no unstyled row
|
|
divisor = GetRowCount();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
for (rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rgFrame->HasStyleHeight()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rowFrame->HasStyleHeight()) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rowFrame->GetSize().height >= 0,
|
|
"negative row frame height");
|
|
divisor += rowFrame->GetSize().height;
|
|
eligibleRows++;
|
|
lastEligibleRow = rowFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (divisor <= 0) {
|
|
if (eligibleRows > 0) {
|
|
expandEmptyRows = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ERROR("invalid divisor");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// allocate the extra height to the unstyled row groups and rows
|
|
nscoord heightToDistribute = aAmount - amountUsed;
|
|
yOriginRG = borderPadding.top + cellSpacingY;
|
|
yEndRG = yOriginRG;
|
|
for (rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
nscoord amountUsedByRG = 0;
|
|
nscoord yOriginRow = 0;
|
|
nsRect rgRect = rgFrame->GetRect();
|
|
// see if there is an eligible row group or we distribute to all rows
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rgFrame->HasStyleHeight() || !eligibleRows) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
nsRect rowRect = rowFrame->GetRect();
|
|
// see if there is an eligible row or we distribute to all rows
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRow || !rowFrame->HasStyleHeight() || !eligibleRows) {
|
|
float ratio;
|
|
if (eligibleRows) {
|
|
if (!expandEmptyRows) {
|
|
// The amount of additional space each row gets is proportional to
|
|
// its height
|
|
ratio = float(rowRect.height) / float(divisor);
|
|
} else {
|
|
// empty rows get all the same additional space
|
|
ratio = 1.0f / float(eligibleRows);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// all rows get the same additional space
|
|
ratio = 1.0f / float(divisor);
|
|
}
|
|
// give rows their additional space, except for the last row which
|
|
// gets the remainder
|
|
nscoord amountForRow = (rowFrame == lastEligibleRow)
|
|
? aAmount - amountUsed : NSToCoordRound(((float)(heightToDistribute)) * ratio);
|
|
amountForRow = PR_MIN(amountForRow, aAmount - amountUsed);
|
|
|
|
if (yOriginRow != rowRect.y) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// update the row height
|
|
nsRect newRowRect(rowRect.x, yOriginRow, rowRect.width,
|
|
rowRect.height + amountForRow);
|
|
rowFrame->SetRect(newRowRect);
|
|
|
|
yOriginRow += newRowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
yEndRG += newRowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
|
|
amountUsed += amountForRow;
|
|
amountUsedByRG += amountForRow;
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((amountUsed <= aAmount), "invalid row allocation");
|
|
//rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateFrame(rowFrame, rowRect, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0 && yOriginRow != rowRect.y) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
rowFrame->SetPosition(nsPoint(rowRect.x, yOriginRow));
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
yOriginRow += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
yEndRG += rowRect.height + cellSpacingY;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0) {
|
|
if (rgRect.y != yOriginRG) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rgFrame->SetRect(nsRect(rgRect.x, yOriginRG, rgRect.width,
|
|
rgRect.height + amountUsedByRG));
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateFrame(rgFrame, rgRect, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
// Make sure child views are properly positioned
|
|
// XXX what happens if childFrame is a scroll frame and this gets skipped? see also below
|
|
}
|
|
else if (amountUsed > 0 && yOriginRG != rgFrame->GetPosition().y) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame->GetPosition().x == 0, "Unexpected position");
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
rgFrame->SetPosition(nsPoint(0, yOriginRG));
|
|
// Make sure child views are properly positioned
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rgFrame);
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
}
|
|
yOriginRG = yEndRG;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
ResizeCells(*this);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsPctHeight(nsStyleContext* aStyleContext)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (aStyleContext) {
|
|
result = (eStyleUnit_Percent ==
|
|
aStyleContext->GetStylePosition()->mHeight.GetUnit());
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetColumnWidth(PRInt32 aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame * firstInFlow = (nsTableFrame *)GetFirstInFlow();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(firstInFlow, "illegal state -- no first in flow");
|
|
PRInt32 result = 0;
|
|
if (this == firstInFlow) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(aColIndex);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
result = colFrame->GetFinalWidth();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
result = firstInFlow->GetColumnWidth(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableFrame::SetColumnWidth(PRInt32 aColIndex, nscoord aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame* firstInFlow = (nsTableFrame *)GetFirstInFlow();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(firstInFlow, "illegal state -- no first in flow");
|
|
|
|
if (this == firstInFlow) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(aColIndex);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
colFrame->SetFinalWidth(aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "null col frame");
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
firstInFlow->SetColumnWidth(aColIndex, aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX: could cache this. But be sure to check style changes if you do!
|
|
nscoord nsTableFrame::GetCellSpacingX()
|
|
{
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(GetStyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingX.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Coord,
|
|
"Not a coord value!");
|
|
return GetStyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingX.GetCoordValue();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX: could cache this. But be sure to check style changes if you do!
|
|
nscoord nsTableFrame::GetCellSpacingY()
|
|
{
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(GetStyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingY.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Coord,
|
|
"Not a coord value!");
|
|
return GetStyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingY.GetCoordValue();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetBaseline() const
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord ascent = 0;
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstRow = nsnull;
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
// XXXbz Do we really want to just let through the scrollable
|
|
// rowgroups and use their ascent?
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = orderedRowGroups[rgIndex];
|
|
if (rgFrame->GetRowCount()) {
|
|
firstRow = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
ascent = rgFrame->GetRect().y + firstRow->GetRect().y + firstRow->GetRowBaseline();
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!firstRow)
|
|
ascent = GetRect().height;
|
|
return ascent;
|
|
}
|
|
/* ----- global methods ----- */
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
NS_NewTableFrame(nsIPresShell* aPresShell, nsStyleContext* aContext)
|
|
{
|
|
return new (aPresShell) nsTableFrame(aContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTableFrame(nsIFrame* aSourceFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
if (aSourceFrame) {
|
|
// "result" is the result of intermediate calls, not the result we return from this method
|
|
for (nsIFrame* parentFrame = aSourceFrame->GetParent(); parentFrame;
|
|
parentFrame = parentFrame->GetParent()) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == parentFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
return (nsTableFrame*)parentFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("unable to find table parent");
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsAutoWidth(PRBool* aIsPctWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
const nsStyleCoord& width = GetStylePosition()->mWidth;
|
|
|
|
if (aIsPctWidth) {
|
|
// XXX The old code also made the return value true for 0%, but that
|
|
// seems silly.
|
|
*aIsPctWidth = width.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Percent &&
|
|
width.GetPercentValue() > 0.0f;
|
|
// Should this handle -moz-available and -moz-fit-content?
|
|
}
|
|
return width.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Auto;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsAutoHeight()
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool isAuto = PR_TRUE; // the default
|
|
|
|
const nsStylePosition* position = GetStylePosition();
|
|
|
|
switch (position->mHeight.GetUnit()) {
|
|
case eStyleUnit_Auto: // specified auto width
|
|
break;
|
|
case eStyleUnit_Coord:
|
|
isAuto = PR_FALSE;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eStyleUnit_Percent:
|
|
if (position->mHeight.GetPercentValue() > 0.0f) {
|
|
isAuto = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
default:
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return isAuto;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcBorderBoxHeight(const nsHTMLReflowState& aState)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord height = aState.ComputedHeight();
|
|
if (NS_AUTOHEIGHT != height) {
|
|
nsMargin borderPadding = GetContentAreaOffset(&aState);
|
|
height += borderPadding.top + borderPadding.bottom;
|
|
}
|
|
height = PR_MAX(0, height);
|
|
|
|
return height;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsAutoLayout()
|
|
{
|
|
if (GetStyleTable()->mLayoutStrategy == NS_STYLE_TABLE_LAYOUT_AUTO)
|
|
return PR_TRUE;
|
|
// a fixed-layout inline-table must have a width
|
|
// and tables with 'width: -moz-max-content' must be auto-layout
|
|
// (at least as long as FixedTableLayoutStrategy::GetPrefWidth returns
|
|
// nscoord_MAX)
|
|
const nsStyleCoord &width = GetStylePosition()->mWidth;
|
|
return (width.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Auto) ||
|
|
(width.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Enumerated &&
|
|
width.GetIntValue() == NS_STYLE_WIDTH_MAX_CONTENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFrameName(nsAString& aResult) const
|
|
{
|
|
return MakeFrameName(NS_LITERAL_STRING("Table"), aResult);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Find the closet sibling before aPriorChildFrame (including aPriorChildFrame) that
|
|
// is of type aChildType
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFrameAtOrBefore(nsIFrame* aParentFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPriorChildFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aChildType)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* result = nsnull;
|
|
if (!aPriorChildFrame) {
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
if (aChildType == aPriorChildFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
return aPriorChildFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// aPriorChildFrame is not of type aChildType, so we need start from
|
|
// the beginnng and find the closest one
|
|
nsIFrame* lastMatchingFrame = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = aParentFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (childFrame && (childFrame != aPriorChildFrame)) {
|
|
if (aChildType == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
lastMatchingFrame = childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
return lastMatchingFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DumpRowGroup(nsIFrame* aKidFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = GetRowGroupFrame(aKidFrame);
|
|
if (rgFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == rowFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
printf("row(%d)=%p ", ((nsTableRowFrame*)rowFrame)->GetRowIndex(), rowFrame);
|
|
nsIFrame* cellFrame = rowFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while (cellFrame) {
|
|
if (IS_TABLE_CELL(cellFrame->GetType())) {
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex;
|
|
((nsTableCellFrame*)cellFrame)->GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
printf("cell(%d)=%p ", colIndex, cellFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
cellFrame = cellFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DumpRowGroup(rowFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::Dump(PRBool aDumpRows,
|
|
PRBool aDumpCols,
|
|
PRBool aDumpCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
printf("***START TABLE DUMP*** \n");
|
|
// dump the columns widths array
|
|
printf("mColWidths=");
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
PRInt32 colX;
|
|
for (colX = 0; colX < numCols; colX++) {
|
|
printf("%d ", GetColumnWidth(colX));
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
|
|
if (aDumpRows) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
DumpRowGroup(kidFrame);
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aDumpCols) {
|
|
// output col frame cache
|
|
printf("\n col frame cache ->");
|
|
for (colX = 0; colX < numCols; colX++) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = (nsTableColFrame *)mColFrames.ElementAt(colX);
|
|
if (0 == (colX % 8)) {
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
}
|
|
printf ("%d=%p ", colX, colFrame);
|
|
nsTableColType colType = colFrame->GetColType();
|
|
switch (colType) {
|
|
case eColContent:
|
|
printf(" content ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousCol:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-column ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousColGroup:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-colgroup ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousCell:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-cell ");
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n colgroups->");
|
|
for (nsIFrame* childFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild(); childFrame;
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroupFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)childFrame;
|
|
colGroupFrame->Dump(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
for (colX = 0; colX < numCols; colX++) {
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colX);
|
|
colFrame->Dump(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (aDumpCellMap) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
cellMap->Dump();
|
|
}
|
|
printf(" ***END TABLE DUMP*** \n");
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// nsTableIterator
|
|
nsTableIterator::nsTableIterator(nsIFrame& aSource)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* firstChild = aSource.GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
Init(firstChild);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableIterator::nsTableIterator(nsFrameList& aSource)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* firstChild = aSource.FirstChild();
|
|
Init(firstChild);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void nsTableIterator::Init(nsIFrame* aFirstChild)
|
|
{
|
|
mFirstListChild = aFirstChild;
|
|
mFirstChild = aFirstChild;
|
|
mCurrentChild = nsnull;
|
|
mLeftToRight = PR_TRUE;
|
|
mCount = -1;
|
|
|
|
if (!mFirstChild) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* table = nsTableFrame::GetTableFrame(mFirstChild);
|
|
if (table) {
|
|
mLeftToRight = (NS_STYLE_DIRECTION_LTR ==
|
|
table->GetStyleVisibility()->mDirection);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("source of table iterator is not part of a table");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!mLeftToRight) {
|
|
mCount = 0;
|
|
nsIFrame* nextChild = mFirstChild->GetNextSibling();
|
|
while (nsnull != nextChild) {
|
|
mCount++;
|
|
mFirstChild = nextChild;
|
|
nextChild = nextChild->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* nsTableIterator::First()
|
|
{
|
|
mCurrentChild = mFirstChild;
|
|
return mCurrentChild;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* nsTableIterator::Next()
|
|
{
|
|
if (!mCurrentChild) {
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (mLeftToRight) {
|
|
mCurrentChild = mCurrentChild->GetNextSibling();
|
|
return mCurrentChild;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsIFrame* targetChild = mCurrentChild;
|
|
mCurrentChild = nsnull;
|
|
nsIFrame* child = mFirstListChild;
|
|
while (child && (child != targetChild)) {
|
|
mCurrentChild = child;
|
|
child = child->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
return mCurrentChild;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableIterator::IsLeftToRight()
|
|
{
|
|
return mLeftToRight;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableIterator::Count()
|
|
{
|
|
if (-1 == mCount) {
|
|
mCount = 0;
|
|
nsIFrame* child = mFirstListChild;
|
|
while (nsnull != child) {
|
|
mCount++;
|
|
child = child->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return mCount;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*------------------ nsITableLayout methods ------------------------------*/
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetCellDataAt(PRInt32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndex,
|
|
nsIDOMElement* &aCell, //out params
|
|
PRInt32& aStartRowIndex,
|
|
PRInt32& aStartColIndex,
|
|
PRInt32& aRowSpan,
|
|
PRInt32& aColSpan,
|
|
PRInt32& aActualRowSpan,
|
|
PRInt32& aActualColSpan,
|
|
PRBool& aIsSelected)
|
|
{
|
|
// Initialize out params
|
|
aCell = nsnull;
|
|
aStartRowIndex = 0;
|
|
aStartColIndex = 0;
|
|
aRowSpan = 0;
|
|
aColSpan = 0;
|
|
aIsSelected = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap) { return NS_ERROR_NOT_INITIALIZED;}
|
|
|
|
PRBool originates;
|
|
PRInt32 colSpan; // Is this the "effective" or "html" value?
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellFrame *cellFrame = cellMap->GetCellInfoAt(aRowIndex, aColIndex, &originates, &colSpan);
|
|
if (!cellFrame) return NS_TABLELAYOUT_CELL_NOT_FOUND;
|
|
|
|
nsresult result= cellFrame->GetRowIndex(aStartRowIndex);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(result)) return result;
|
|
result = cellFrame->GetColIndex(aStartColIndex);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(result)) return result;
|
|
//This returns HTML value, which may be 0
|
|
aRowSpan = cellFrame->GetRowSpan();
|
|
aColSpan = cellFrame->GetColSpan();
|
|
aActualRowSpan = GetEffectiveRowSpan(*cellFrame);
|
|
aActualColSpan = GetEffectiveColSpan(*cellFrame);
|
|
|
|
// If these aren't at least 1, we have a cellmap error
|
|
if (aActualRowSpan == 0 || aActualColSpan == 0)
|
|
return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
|
|
|
|
result = cellFrame->GetSelected(&aIsSelected);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(result)) return result;
|
|
|
|
// do this last, because it addrefs,
|
|
// and we don't want the caller leaking it on error
|
|
nsIContent* content = cellFrame->GetContent();
|
|
if (!content) return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
|
|
|
|
return CallQueryInterface(content, &aCell);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP nsTableFrame::GetTableSize(PRInt32& aRowCount, PRInt32& aColCount)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
// Initialize out params
|
|
aRowCount = 0;
|
|
aColCount = 0;
|
|
if (!cellMap) { return NS_ERROR_NOT_INITIALIZED;}
|
|
|
|
aRowCount = cellMap->GetRowCount();
|
|
aColCount = cellMap->GetColCount();
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetIndexByRowAndColumn(PRInt32 aRow, PRInt32 aColumn,
|
|
PRInt32 *aIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ENSURE_ARG_POINTER(aIndex);
|
|
*aIndex = -1;
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap)
|
|
return NS_ERROR_NOT_INITIALIZED;
|
|
|
|
*aIndex = cellMap->GetIndexByRowAndColumn(aRow, aColumn);
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHODIMP
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetRowAndColumnByIndex(PRInt32 aIndex,
|
|
PRInt32 *aRow, PRInt32 *aColumn)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ENSURE_ARG_POINTER(aRow);
|
|
*aRow = -1;
|
|
|
|
NS_ENSURE_ARG_POINTER(aColumn);
|
|
*aColumn = -1;
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap)
|
|
return NS_ERROR_NOT_INITIALIZED;
|
|
|
|
cellMap->GetRowAndColumnByIndex(aIndex, aRow, aColumn);
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*---------------- end of nsITableLayout implementation ------------------*/
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(PRInt32 aColIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap)
|
|
return cellMap->GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(aColIndex);
|
|
else
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 nsTableFrame::GetNumCellsOriginatingInRow(PRInt32 aRowIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap)
|
|
return cellMap->GetNumCellsOriginatingInRow(aRowIndex);
|
|
else
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
CheckFixDamageArea(PRInt32 aNumRows,
|
|
PRInt32 aNumCols,
|
|
nsRect& aDamageArea)
|
|
{
|
|
if (((aDamageArea.XMost() > aNumCols) && (aDamageArea.width != 1) && (aNumCols != 0)) ||
|
|
((aDamageArea.YMost() > aNumRows) && (aDamageArea.height != 1) && (aNumRows != 0))) {
|
|
// the damage area was set incorrectly, just be safe and make it the entire table
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "invalid BC damage area");
|
|
aDamageArea.x = 0;
|
|
aDamageArea.y = 0;
|
|
aDamageArea.width = aNumCols;
|
|
aDamageArea.height = aNumRows;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
* Collapsing Borders
|
|
*
|
|
* The CSS spec says to resolve border conflicts in this order:
|
|
* 1) any border with the style HIDDEN wins
|
|
* 2) the widest border with a style that is not NONE wins
|
|
* 3) the border styles are ranked in this order, highest to lowest precedence:
|
|
* double, solid, dashed, dotted, ridge, outset, groove, inset
|
|
* 4) borders that are of equal width and style (differ only in color) have this precedence:
|
|
* cell, row, rowgroup, col, colgroup, table
|
|
* 5) if all border styles are NONE, then that's the computed border style.
|
|
*******************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetBCDamageArea(const nsRect& aValue)
|
|
{
|
|
nsRect newRect(aValue);
|
|
newRect.width = PR_MAX(1, newRect.width);
|
|
newRect.height = PR_MAX(1, newRect.height);
|
|
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "invalid call - not border collapse model");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
SetNeedToCalcBCBorders(PR_TRUE);
|
|
// Get the property
|
|
BCPropertyData* value = (BCPropertyData*)nsTableFrame::GetProperty(this, nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty, PR_TRUE);
|
|
if (value) {
|
|
// for now just construct a union of the new and old damage areas
|
|
value->mDamageArea.UnionRect(value->mDamageArea, newRect);
|
|
CheckFixDamageArea(GetRowCount(), GetColCount(), value->mDamageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
/*****************************************************************
|
|
* BCMapCellIterator
|
|
****************************************************************/
|
|
struct BCMapCellInfo
|
|
{
|
|
BCMapCellInfo();
|
|
void Reset();
|
|
|
|
CellData* cellData;
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap;
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg;
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* topRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* bottomRow;
|
|
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cg;
|
|
|
|
nsTableColFrame* leftCol;
|
|
nsTableColFrame* rightCol;
|
|
|
|
nsBCTableCellFrame* cell;
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex;
|
|
PRInt32 rowSpan;
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex;
|
|
PRInt32 colSpan;
|
|
|
|
PRPackedBool rgTop;
|
|
PRPackedBool rgBottom;
|
|
PRPackedBool cgLeft;
|
|
PRPackedBool cgRight;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::BCMapCellInfo()
|
|
{
|
|
Reset();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void BCMapCellInfo::Reset()
|
|
{
|
|
cellData = nsnull;
|
|
rg = nsnull;
|
|
topRow = nsnull;
|
|
bottomRow = nsnull;
|
|
cg = nsnull;
|
|
leftCol = nsnull;
|
|
rightCol = nsnull;
|
|
cell = nsnull;
|
|
rowIndex = rowSpan = colIndex = colSpan = 0;
|
|
rgTop = rgBottom = cgLeft = cgRight = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class BCMapCellIterator
|
|
{
|
|
public:
|
|
BCMapCellIterator(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea);
|
|
|
|
void First(BCMapCellInfo& aMapCellInfo);
|
|
|
|
void Next(BCMapCellInfo& aMapCellInfo);
|
|
|
|
void PeekRight(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
PRUint32 aRowIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo);
|
|
|
|
void PeekBottom(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
PRUint32 aColIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo);
|
|
|
|
PRBool IsNewRow() { return mIsNewRow; }
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* GetPrevRow() const { return mPrevRow; }
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 mRowGroupStart;
|
|
PRInt32 mRowGroupEnd;
|
|
PRBool mAtEnd;
|
|
nsCellMap* mCellMap;
|
|
|
|
private:
|
|
void SetInfo(nsTableRowFrame* aRow,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndex,
|
|
CellData* aCellData,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aMapInfo,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap = nsnull);
|
|
|
|
PRBool SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* row = nsnull);
|
|
PRBool SetNewRowGroup(PRBool aFindFirstDamagedRow);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame& mTableFrame;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* mTableCellMap;
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray mRowGroups;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mRowGroup;
|
|
PRInt32 mRowGroupIndex;
|
|
PRUint32 mNumRows;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mPrevRow;
|
|
PRBool mIsNewRow;
|
|
PRInt32 mRowIndex;
|
|
PRUint32 mNumCols;
|
|
PRInt32 mColIndex;
|
|
nsPoint mAreaStart;
|
|
nsPoint mAreaEnd;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::BCMapCellIterator(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea)
|
|
:mTableFrame(aTableFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
mTableCellMap = aTableFrame.GetCellMap();
|
|
|
|
mAreaStart.x = aDamageArea.x;
|
|
mAreaStart.y = aDamageArea.y;
|
|
mAreaEnd.y = aDamageArea.y + aDamageArea.height - 1;
|
|
mAreaEnd.x = aDamageArea.x + aDamageArea.width - 1;
|
|
|
|
mNumRows = mTableFrame.GetRowCount();
|
|
mRow = nsnull;
|
|
mRowIndex = 0;
|
|
mNumCols = mTableFrame.GetColCount();
|
|
mColIndex = 0;
|
|
mRowGroupIndex = -1;
|
|
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
aTableFrame.OrderRowGroups(mRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_TRUE; // gets reset when First() is called
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::SetInfo(nsTableRowFrame* aRow,
|
|
PRInt32 aColIndex,
|
|
CellData* aCellData,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aCellInfo,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
aCellInfo.cellData = aCellData;
|
|
aCellInfo.cellMap = (aCellMap) ? aCellMap : mCellMap;
|
|
aCellInfo.colIndex = aColIndex;
|
|
|
|
// row frame info
|
|
aCellInfo.rowIndex = 0;
|
|
if (aRow) {
|
|
aCellInfo.topRow = aRow;
|
|
aCellInfo.rowIndex = aRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// cell frame info
|
|
aCellInfo.cell = nsnull;
|
|
aCellInfo.rowSpan = 1;
|
|
aCellInfo.colSpan = 1;
|
|
if (aCellData) {
|
|
aCellInfo.cell = (nsBCTableCellFrame*)aCellData->GetCellFrame();
|
|
if (aCellInfo.cell) {
|
|
if (!aCellInfo.topRow) {
|
|
aCellInfo.topRow = static_cast<nsTableRowFrame*>
|
|
(aCellInfo.cell->GetParent());
|
|
if (!aCellInfo.topRow) ABORT0();
|
|
aCellInfo.rowIndex = aCellInfo.topRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
aCellInfo.colSpan = mTableFrame.GetEffectiveColSpan(*aCellInfo.cell, aCellMap);
|
|
aCellInfo.rowSpan = mTableFrame.GetEffectiveRowSpan(*aCellInfo.cell, aCellMap);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!aCellInfo.topRow) {
|
|
aCellInfo.topRow = mRow;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (1 == aCellInfo.rowSpan) {
|
|
aCellInfo.bottomRow = aCellInfo.topRow;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
aCellInfo.bottomRow = aCellInfo.topRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
if (aCellInfo.bottomRow) {
|
|
for (PRInt32 spanX = 2; aCellInfo.bottomRow && (spanX < aCellInfo.rowSpan); spanX++) {
|
|
aCellInfo.bottomRow = aCellInfo.bottomRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aCellInfo.bottomRow, "program error");
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "error in cell map");
|
|
aCellInfo.rowSpan = 1;
|
|
aCellInfo.bottomRow = aCellInfo.topRow;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// row group frame info
|
|
PRUint32 rgStart = mRowGroupStart;
|
|
PRUint32 rgEnd = mRowGroupEnd;
|
|
aCellInfo.rg = mTableFrame.GetRowGroupFrame(aCellInfo.topRow->GetParent());
|
|
if (aCellInfo.rg != mRowGroup) {
|
|
rgStart = aCellInfo.rg->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
rgEnd = rgStart + aCellInfo.rg->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
PRUint32 rowIndex = aCellInfo.topRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
aCellInfo.rgTop = (rgStart == rowIndex);
|
|
aCellInfo.rgBottom = (rgEnd == rowIndex + aCellInfo.rowSpan - 1);
|
|
|
|
// col frame info
|
|
aCellInfo.leftCol = mTableFrame.GetColFrame(aColIndex); if (!aCellInfo.leftCol) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
aCellInfo.rightCol = aCellInfo.leftCol;
|
|
if (aCellInfo.colSpan > 1) {
|
|
for (PRInt32 spanX = 1; spanX < aCellInfo.colSpan; spanX++) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = mTableFrame.GetColFrame(aColIndex + spanX); if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
aCellInfo.rightCol = colFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// col group frame info
|
|
aCellInfo.cg = static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>
|
|
(aCellInfo.leftCol->GetParent());
|
|
PRInt32 cgStart = aCellInfo.cg->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
PRInt32 cgEnd = PR_MAX(0, cgStart + aCellInfo.cg->GetColCount() - 1);
|
|
aCellInfo.cgLeft = (cgStart == aColIndex);
|
|
aCellInfo.cgRight = (cgEnd == aColIndex + (PRInt32)aCellInfo.colSpan - 1);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow)
|
|
{
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
mPrevRow = mRow;
|
|
if (aRow) {
|
|
mRow = aRow;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (mRow) {
|
|
mRow = mRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRow) {
|
|
mRowIndex = mRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
// get to the first entry with an originating cell
|
|
PRInt32 rgRowIndex = mRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
if (PRUint32(rgRowIndex) >= mCellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row = mCellMap->mRows[rgRowIndex];
|
|
|
|
for (mColIndex = mAreaStart.x; mColIndex <= mAreaEnd.x; mColIndex++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(mColIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
nsRect damageArea;
|
|
cellData = mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nsnull, rgRowIndex, PR_FALSE, damageArea); if (!cellData) ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsOrig() || cellData->IsDead())) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mIsNewRow = PR_TRUE;
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::SetNewRowGroup(PRBool aFindFirstDamagedRow)
|
|
{
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
PRInt32 numRowGroups = mRowGroups.Length();
|
|
mCellMap = nsnull;
|
|
for (mRowGroupIndex++; mRowGroupIndex < numRowGroups; mRowGroupIndex++) {
|
|
mRowGroup = mRowGroups[mRowGroupIndex];
|
|
PRInt32 rowCount = mRowGroup->GetRowCount();
|
|
mRowGroupStart = mRowGroup->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
mRowGroupEnd = mRowGroupStart + rowCount - 1;
|
|
if (rowCount > 0) {
|
|
mCellMap = mTableCellMap->GetMapFor(mRowGroup, mCellMap);
|
|
if (!mCellMap) ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstRow = mRowGroup->GetFirstRow();
|
|
if (aFindFirstDamagedRow) {
|
|
if ((mAreaStart.y >= mRowGroupStart) && (mAreaStart.y <= mRowGroupEnd)) {
|
|
// the damage area starts in the row group
|
|
if (aFindFirstDamagedRow) {
|
|
// find the correct first damaged row
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = mAreaStart.y - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
for (PRInt32 i = 0; i < numRows; i++) {
|
|
firstRow = firstRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
if (!firstRow) ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (SetNewRow(firstRow)) { // sets mAtEnd
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::First(BCMapCellInfo& aMapInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aMapInfo.Reset();
|
|
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(PR_TRUE); // sets mAtEnd
|
|
while (!mAtEnd) {
|
|
if ((mAreaStart.y >= mRowGroupStart) && (mAreaStart.y <= mRowGroupEnd)) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = mCellMap->GetDataAt(mAreaStart.y - mRowGroupStart,
|
|
mAreaStart.x);
|
|
if (cellData && cellData->IsOrig()) {
|
|
SetInfo(mRow, mAreaStart.x, cellData, aMapInfo);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(((0 == mAreaStart.x) && (mRowGroupStart == mAreaStart.y)) , "damage area expanded incorrectly");
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(PR_TRUE); // sets mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::Next(BCMapCellInfo& aMapInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (mAtEnd) ABORT0();
|
|
aMapInfo.Reset();
|
|
|
|
mIsNewRow = PR_FALSE;
|
|
mColIndex++;
|
|
while ((mRowIndex <= mAreaEnd.y) && !mAtEnd) {
|
|
for (; mColIndex <= mAreaEnd.x; mColIndex++) {
|
|
PRInt32 rgRowIndex = mRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
CellData* cellData = mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, mColIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
nsRect damageArea;
|
|
cellData = mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nsnull, rgRowIndex, PR_FALSE, damageArea); if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsOrig() || cellData->IsDead())) {
|
|
SetInfo(mRow, mColIndex, cellData, aMapInfo);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRowIndex >= mRowGroupEnd) {
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(PR_FALSE); // could set mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
SetNewRow(); // could set mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mAtEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::PeekRight(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
PRUint32 aRowIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aAjaInfo.Reset();
|
|
PRInt32 colIndex = aRefInfo.colIndex + aRefInfo.colSpan;
|
|
PRUint32 rgRowIndex = aRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
|
|
CellData* cellData = mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(colIndex < mTableCellMap->GetColCount(), "program error");
|
|
nsRect damageArea;
|
|
cellData = mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nsnull, rgRowIndex, PR_FALSE, damageArea); if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* row = nsnull;
|
|
if (cellData->IsRowSpan()) {
|
|
rgRowIndex -= cellData->GetRowSpanOffset();
|
|
cellData = mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData)
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
row = mRow;
|
|
}
|
|
SetInfo(row, colIndex, cellData, aAjaInfo);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::PeekBottom(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
PRUint32 aColIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aAjaInfo.Reset();
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex = aRefInfo.rowIndex + aRefInfo.rowSpan;
|
|
PRInt32 rgRowIndex = rowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg = mRowGroup;
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap = mCellMap;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* nextRow = nsnull;
|
|
if (rowIndex > mRowGroupEnd) {
|
|
PRInt32 nextRgIndex = mRowGroupIndex;
|
|
do {
|
|
nextRgIndex++;
|
|
rg = mRowGroups.SafeElementAt(nextRgIndex);
|
|
if (rg) {
|
|
cellMap = mTableCellMap->GetMapFor(rg, cellMap); if (!cellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
rgRowIndex = 0;
|
|
nextRow = rg->GetFirstRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
while (rg && !nextRow);
|
|
if(!rg) return;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// get the row within the same row group
|
|
nextRow = mRow;
|
|
for (PRInt32 i = 0; i < aRefInfo.rowSpan; i++) {
|
|
nextRow = nextRow->GetNextRow(); if (!nextRow) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
CellData* cellData = cellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, aColIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgRowIndex < cellMap->GetRowCount(), "program error");
|
|
nsRect damageArea;
|
|
cellData = cellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nsnull, rgRowIndex, PR_FALSE, damageArea); if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData->IsColSpan()) {
|
|
aColIndex -= cellData->GetColSpanOffset();
|
|
cellData = cellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
SetInfo(nextRow, aColIndex, cellData, aAjaInfo, cellMap);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Assign priorities to border styles. For example, styleToPriority(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID)
|
|
// will return the priority of NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID.
|
|
static PRUint8 styleToPriority[13] = { 0, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE
|
|
2, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_GROOVE
|
|
4, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RIDGE
|
|
5, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED
|
|
6, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED
|
|
7, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID
|
|
8, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOUBLE
|
|
1, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_INSET
|
|
3, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_OUTSET
|
|
9 };// NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN
|
|
// priority rules follow CSS 2.1 spec
|
|
// 'hidden', 'double', 'solid', 'dashed', 'dotted', 'ridge', 'outset', 'groove',
|
|
// and the lowest: 'inset'. none is even weaker
|
|
#define CELL_CORNER PR_TRUE
|
|
|
|
/** return the border style, border color for a given frame and side
|
|
* @param aFrame - query the info for this frame
|
|
* @param aSide - the side of the frame
|
|
* @param aStyle - the border style
|
|
* @param aColor - the border color
|
|
* @param aTableIsLTR - table direction is LTR
|
|
* @param aIgnoreTableEdge - if is a table edge any borders set for the purpose
|
|
* of satisfying the rules attribute should be ignored
|
|
*/
|
|
static void
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(const nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
PRUint8& aStyle,
|
|
nscolor& aColor,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR,
|
|
PRBool aIgnoreTableEdge)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aFrame, "null frame");
|
|
// initialize out arg
|
|
aColor = 0;
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* styleData = aFrame->GetStyleBorder();
|
|
if(!aTableIsLTR) { // revert the directions
|
|
if (NS_SIDE_RIGHT == aSide) {
|
|
aSide = NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_SIDE_LEFT == aSide) {
|
|
aSide = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
aStyle = styleData->GetBorderStyle(aSide);
|
|
|
|
// if the rules marker is set, set the style either to none or remove the mask
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RULES_MARKER & aStyle) {
|
|
if (aIgnoreTableEdge) {
|
|
aStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE;
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
aStyle &= ~NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RULES_MARKER;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if ((NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE == aStyle) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aStyle)) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
PRBool transparent, foreground;
|
|
styleData->GetBorderColor(aSide, aColor, transparent, foreground);
|
|
if (transparent) {
|
|
aColor = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (foreground) {
|
|
aColor = aFrame->GetStyleColor()->mColor;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** coerce the paint style as required by CSS2.1
|
|
* @param aFrame - query the info for this frame
|
|
* @param aSide - the side of the frame
|
|
* @param aStyle - the border style
|
|
* @param aColor - the border color
|
|
* @param aTableIsLTR - table direction is LTR
|
|
* @param aIgnoreTableEdge - if is a table edge any borders set for the purpose
|
|
* of satisfying the rules attribute should be ignored
|
|
*/
|
|
static void
|
|
GetPaintStyleInfo(const nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
PRUint8& aStyle,
|
|
nscolor& aColor,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR,
|
|
PRBool aIgnoreTableEdge)
|
|
{
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aFrame, aSide, aStyle, aColor, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_INSET == aStyle) {
|
|
aStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RIDGE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_OUTSET == aStyle) {
|
|
aStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_GROOVE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** return the border style, border color and the width in pixel for a given
|
|
* frame and side
|
|
* @param aFrame - query the info for this frame
|
|
* @param aSide - the side of the frame
|
|
* @param aStyle - the border style
|
|
* @param aColor - the border color
|
|
* @param aTableIsLTR - table direction is LTR
|
|
* @param aIgnoreTableEdge - if is a table edge any borders set for the purpose
|
|
* of satisfying the rules attribute should be ignored
|
|
* @param aWidth - the border width in px.
|
|
* @param aTwipsToPixels - conversion factor from twips to pixel
|
|
*/
|
|
static void
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(const nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
PRUint8& aStyle,
|
|
nscolor& aColor,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR,
|
|
PRBool aIgnoreTableEdge,
|
|
nscoord& aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aFrame, aSide, aStyle, aColor, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge);
|
|
if ((NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE == aStyle) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aStyle)) {
|
|
aWidth = 0;
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* styleData = aFrame->GetStyleBorder();
|
|
nscoord width;
|
|
if(!aTableIsLTR) { // revert the directions
|
|
if (NS_SIDE_RIGHT == aSide) {
|
|
aSide = NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_SIDE_LEFT == aSide) {
|
|
aSide = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
width = styleData->GetBorderWidth(aSide);
|
|
aWidth = nsPresContext::AppUnitsToIntCSSPixels(width);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* BCCellBorder represents a border segment which can be either a horizontal
|
|
* or a vertical segment. For each segment we need to know the color, width,
|
|
* style, who owns it and how long it is in cellmap coordinates.
|
|
* Ownership of these segments is important to calculate which corners should
|
|
* be bevelled. This structure has dual use, its used first to compute the
|
|
* dominant border for horizontal and vertical segments and to store the
|
|
* preliminary computed border results in the BCCellBorders structure.
|
|
* This temporary storage is not symmetric with respect to horizontal and
|
|
* vertical border segments, its always column oriented. For each column in
|
|
* the cellmap there is a temporary stored vertical and horizontal segment.
|
|
* XXX_Bernd this asymmetry is the root of those rowspan bc border errors
|
|
*/
|
|
struct BCCellBorder
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder() { Reset(0, 1); }
|
|
void Reset(PRUint32 aRowIndex, PRUint32 aRowSpan);
|
|
nscolor color; // border segment color
|
|
nscoord width; // border segment width in pixel coordinates !!
|
|
PRUint8 style; // border segment style, possible values are defined
|
|
// in nsStyleConsts.h as NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_*
|
|
BCBorderOwner owner; // border segment owner, possible values are defined
|
|
// in celldata.h. In the cellmap for each border
|
|
// segment we store the owner and later when
|
|
// painting we know the owner and can retrieve the
|
|
// style info from the corresponding frame
|
|
PRInt32 rowIndex; // rowIndex of temporary stored horizontal border segments
|
|
PRInt32 rowSpan; // row span of temporary stored horizontal border segments
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCellBorder::Reset(PRUint32 aRowIndex,
|
|
PRUint32 aRowSpan)
|
|
{
|
|
style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE;
|
|
color = 0;
|
|
width = 0;
|
|
owner = eTableOwner;
|
|
rowIndex = aRowIndex;
|
|
rowSpan = aRowSpan;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Compare two border segments, this comparison depends whether the two
|
|
// segments meet at a corner and whether the second segment is horizontal.
|
|
// The return value is whichever of aBorder1 or aBorder2 dominates.
|
|
static const BCCellBorder&
|
|
CompareBorders(PRBool aIsCorner, // Pass PR_TRUE for corner calculations
|
|
const BCCellBorder& aBorder1,
|
|
const BCCellBorder& aBorder2,
|
|
PRBool aSecondIsHorizontal,
|
|
PRBool* aFirstDominates = nsnull)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool firstDominates = PR_TRUE;
|
|
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aBorder1.style) {
|
|
firstDominates = (aIsCorner) ? PR_FALSE : PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aBorder2.style) {
|
|
firstDominates = (aIsCorner) ? PR_TRUE : PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.width < aBorder2.width) {
|
|
firstDominates = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.width == aBorder2.width) {
|
|
if (styleToPriority[aBorder1.style] < styleToPriority[aBorder2.style]) {
|
|
firstDominates = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (styleToPriority[aBorder1.style] == styleToPriority[aBorder2.style]) {
|
|
if (aBorder1.owner == aBorder2.owner) {
|
|
firstDominates = !aSecondIsHorizontal;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.owner < aBorder2.owner) {
|
|
firstDominates = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aFirstDominates)
|
|
*aFirstDominates = firstDominates;
|
|
|
|
if (firstDominates)
|
|
return aBorder1;
|
|
return aBorder2;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** calc the dominant border by considering the table, row/col group, row/col,
|
|
* cell. At the table edges borders coming from the 'rules' attribute should
|
|
* be ignored as they are only inner borders.
|
|
* Depending on whether the side is vertical or horizontal and whether
|
|
* adjacent frames are taken into account the ownership of a single border
|
|
* segment is defined. The return value is the dominating border
|
|
* The cellmap stores only top and left borders for each cellmap position.
|
|
* If the cell border is owned by the cell that is left of the border
|
|
* it will be an adjacent owner aka eAjaCellOwner. See celldata.h for the other
|
|
* scenarios with a adjacent owner.
|
|
* @param xxxFrame - the frame for style information, might be zero if
|
|
* it should not be considered
|
|
* @param aIgnoreTableEdge - if true the border should be ignored at the table
|
|
* edge, as rules can be drawn only inside the table
|
|
* @param aSide - side of the frames that should be considered
|
|
* @param aAja - the border comparison takes place from the point of
|
|
* a frame that is adjacent to the cellmap entry, for
|
|
* when a cell owns its lower border it will be the
|
|
* adjacent owner as in the cellmap only top and left
|
|
* borders are stored.
|
|
* @param aTwipsToPixels - conversion factor as borders need to be drawn pixel
|
|
* aligned.
|
|
*/
|
|
static BCCellBorder
|
|
CompareBorders(const nsIFrame* aTableFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aColFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aRowFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aCellFrame,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR,
|
|
PRBool aIgnoreTableEdge,
|
|
PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
PRBool aAja)
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder border, tempBorder;
|
|
PRBool horizontal = (NS_SIDE_TOP == aSide) || (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM == aSide);
|
|
|
|
// start with the table as dominant if present
|
|
if (aTableFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aTableFrame, aSide, border.style, border.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, border.width);
|
|
border.owner = eTableOwner;
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the colgroup is dominant
|
|
if (aColGroupFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aColGroupFrame, aSide, tempBorder.style, tempBorder.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = (aAja && !horizontal) ? eAjaColGroupOwner : eColGroupOwner;
|
|
// pass here and below PR_FALSE for aSecondIsHorizontal as it is only used for corner calculations.
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the col is dominant
|
|
if (aColFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aColFrame, aSide, tempBorder.style, tempBorder.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = (aAja && !horizontal) ? eAjaColOwner : eColOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the rowgroup is dominant
|
|
if (aRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aRowGroupFrame, aSide, tempBorder.style, tempBorder.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = (aAja && horizontal) ? eAjaRowGroupOwner : eRowGroupOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the row is dominant
|
|
if (aRowFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aRowFrame, aSide, tempBorder.style, tempBorder.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = (aAja && horizontal) ? eAjaRowOwner : eRowOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the cell is dominant
|
|
if (aCellFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aCellFrame, aSide, tempBorder.style, tempBorder.color, aTableIsLTR, aIgnoreTableEdge, tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = (aAja) ? eAjaCellOwner : eCellOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
Perpendicular(PRUint8 aSide1,
|
|
PRUint8 aSide2)
|
|
{
|
|
switch (aSide1) {
|
|
case NS_SIDE_TOP:
|
|
return (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM != aSide2);
|
|
case NS_SIDE_RIGHT:
|
|
return (NS_SIDE_LEFT != aSide2);
|
|
case NS_SIDE_BOTTOM:
|
|
return (NS_SIDE_TOP != aSide2);
|
|
default: // NS_SIDE_LEFT
|
|
return (NS_SIDE_RIGHT != aSide2);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX allocate this as number-of-cols+1 instead of number-of-cols+1 * number-of-rows+1
|
|
struct BCCornerInfo
|
|
{
|
|
BCCornerInfo() { ownerColor = 0; ownerWidth = subWidth = ownerSide = ownerElem = subSide =
|
|
subElem = hasDashDot = numSegs = bevel = 0;
|
|
ownerStyle = 0xFF; subStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID; }
|
|
void Set(PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder border);
|
|
|
|
void Update(PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder border);
|
|
|
|
nscolor ownerColor; // color of borderOwner
|
|
PRUint16 ownerWidth; // pixel width of borderOwner
|
|
PRUint16 subWidth; // pixel width of the largest border intersecting the border perpendicular
|
|
// to ownerSide
|
|
PRUint32 ownerSide:2; // side (e.g NS_SIDE_TOP, NS_SIDE_RIGHT, etc) of the border owning
|
|
// the corner relative to the corner
|
|
PRUint32 ownerElem:3; // elem type (e.g. eTable, eGroup, etc) owning the corner
|
|
PRUint32 ownerStyle:8; // border style of ownerElem
|
|
PRUint32 subSide:2; // side of border with subWidth relative to the corner
|
|
PRUint32 subElem:3; // elem type (e.g. eTable, eGroup, etc) of sub owner
|
|
PRUint32 subStyle:8; // border style of subElem
|
|
PRUint32 hasDashDot:1; // does a dashed, dotted segment enter the corner, they cannot be beveled
|
|
PRUint32 numSegs:3; // number of segments entering corner
|
|
PRUint32 bevel:1; // is the corner beveled (uses the above two fields together with subWidth)
|
|
PRUint32 unused:1;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCornerInfo::Set(PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
ownerElem = aBorder.owner;
|
|
ownerStyle = aBorder.style;
|
|
ownerWidth = aBorder.width;
|
|
ownerColor = aBorder.color;
|
|
ownerSide = aSide;
|
|
hasDashDot = 0;
|
|
numSegs = 0;
|
|
if (aBorder.width > 0) {
|
|
numSegs++;
|
|
hasDashDot = (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED == aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED == aBorder.style);
|
|
}
|
|
bevel = 0;
|
|
subWidth = 0;
|
|
// the following will get set later
|
|
subSide = ((aSide == NS_SIDE_LEFT) || (aSide == NS_SIDE_RIGHT)) ? NS_SIDE_TOP : NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
subElem = eTableOwner;
|
|
subStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCornerInfo::Update(PRUint8 aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool existingWins = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (0xFF == ownerStyle) { // initial value indiating that it hasn't been set yet
|
|
Set(aSide, aBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
PRBool horizontal = (NS_SIDE_LEFT == aSide) || (NS_SIDE_RIGHT == aSide); // relative to the corner
|
|
BCCellBorder oldBorder, tempBorder;
|
|
oldBorder.owner = (BCBorderOwner) ownerElem;
|
|
oldBorder.style = ownerStyle;
|
|
oldBorder.width = ownerWidth;
|
|
oldBorder.color = ownerColor;
|
|
|
|
PRUint8 oldSide = ownerSide;
|
|
|
|
tempBorder = CompareBorders(CELL_CORNER, oldBorder, aBorder, horizontal, &existingWins);
|
|
|
|
ownerElem = tempBorder.owner;
|
|
ownerStyle = tempBorder.style;
|
|
ownerWidth = tempBorder.width;
|
|
ownerColor = tempBorder.color;
|
|
if (existingWins) { // existing corner is dominant
|
|
if (::Perpendicular(ownerSide, aSide)) {
|
|
// see if the new sub info replaces the old
|
|
BCCellBorder subBorder;
|
|
subBorder.owner = (BCBorderOwner) subElem;
|
|
subBorder.style = subStyle;
|
|
subBorder.width = subWidth;
|
|
subBorder.color = 0; // we are not interested in subBorder color
|
|
PRBool firstWins;
|
|
|
|
tempBorder = CompareBorders(CELL_CORNER, subBorder, aBorder, horizontal, &firstWins);
|
|
|
|
subElem = tempBorder.owner;
|
|
subStyle = tempBorder.style;
|
|
subWidth = tempBorder.width;
|
|
if (!firstWins) {
|
|
subSide = aSide;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // input args are dominant
|
|
ownerSide = aSide;
|
|
if (::Perpendicular(oldSide, ownerSide)) {
|
|
subElem = oldBorder.owner;
|
|
subStyle = oldBorder.style;
|
|
subWidth = oldBorder.width;
|
|
subSide = oldSide;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (aBorder.width > 0) {
|
|
numSegs++;
|
|
if (!hasDashDot && ((NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED == aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED == aBorder.style))) {
|
|
hasDashDot = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// bevel the corner if only two perpendicular non dashed/dotted segments enter the corner
|
|
bevel = (2 == numSegs) && (subWidth > 1) && (0 == hasDashDot);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
struct BCCorners
|
|
{
|
|
BCCorners(PRInt32 aNumCorners,
|
|
PRInt32 aStartIndex);
|
|
|
|
~BCCorners() { delete [] corners; }
|
|
|
|
BCCornerInfo& operator [](PRInt32 i) const
|
|
{ NS_ASSERTION((i >= startIndex) && (i <= endIndex), "program error");
|
|
return corners[PR_MAX(PR_MIN(i, endIndex), startIndex) - startIndex]; }
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startIndex;
|
|
PRInt32 endIndex;
|
|
BCCornerInfo* corners;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCCorners::BCCorners(PRInt32 aNumCorners,
|
|
PRInt32 aStartIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((aNumCorners > 0) && (aStartIndex >= 0), "program error");
|
|
startIndex = aStartIndex;
|
|
endIndex = aStartIndex + aNumCorners - 1;
|
|
corners = new BCCornerInfo[aNumCorners];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct BCCellBorders
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorders(PRInt32 aNumBorders,
|
|
PRInt32 aStartIndex);
|
|
|
|
~BCCellBorders() { delete [] borders; }
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder& operator [](PRInt32 i) const
|
|
{ NS_ASSERTION((i >= startIndex) && (i <= endIndex), "program error");
|
|
return borders[PR_MAX(PR_MIN(i, endIndex), startIndex) - startIndex]; }
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startIndex;
|
|
PRInt32 endIndex;
|
|
BCCellBorder* borders;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorders::BCCellBorders(PRInt32 aNumBorders,
|
|
PRInt32 aStartIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((aNumBorders > 0) && (aStartIndex >= 0), "program error");
|
|
startIndex = aStartIndex;
|
|
endIndex = aStartIndex + aNumBorders - 1;
|
|
borders = new BCCellBorder[aNumBorders];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this function sets the new border properties and returns true if the border
|
|
// segment will start a new segment and not prolong the existing segment.
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
SetBorder(const BCCellBorder& aNewBorder,
|
|
BCCellBorder& aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool changed = (aNewBorder.style != aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(aNewBorder.width != aBorder.width) ||
|
|
(aNewBorder.color != aBorder.color);
|
|
aBorder.color = aNewBorder.color;
|
|
aBorder.width = aNewBorder.width;
|
|
aBorder.style = aNewBorder.style;
|
|
aBorder.owner = aNewBorder.owner;
|
|
|
|
return changed;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this function will set the horizontal border. It will return true if the
|
|
// existing segment will not be continued. Having a vertical owner of a corner
|
|
// should also start a new segment.
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
SetHorBorder(const BCCellBorder& aNewBorder,
|
|
const BCCornerInfo& aCorner,
|
|
BCCellBorder& aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool startSeg = ::SetBorder(aNewBorder, aBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
startSeg = ((NS_SIDE_LEFT != aCorner.ownerSide) && (NS_SIDE_RIGHT != aCorner.ownerSide));
|
|
}
|
|
return startSeg;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Make the damage area larger on the top and bottom by at least one row and on the left and right
|
|
// at least one column. This is done so that adjacent elements are part of the border calculations.
|
|
// The extra segments and borders outside the actual damage area will not be updated in the cell map,
|
|
// because they in turn would need info from adjacent segments outside the damage area to be accurate.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ExpandBCDamageArea(nsRect& aRect) const
|
|
{
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = GetRowCount();
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 dStartX = aRect.x;
|
|
PRInt32 dEndX = aRect.XMost() - 1;
|
|
PRInt32 dStartY = aRect.y;
|
|
PRInt32 dEndY = aRect.YMost() - 1;
|
|
|
|
// expand the damage area in each direction
|
|
if (dStartX > 0) {
|
|
dStartX--;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) {
|
|
dEndX++;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dStartY > 0) {
|
|
dStartY--;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndY < (numRows - 1)) {
|
|
dEndY++;
|
|
}
|
|
// Check the damage area so that there are no cells spanning in or out. If there are any then
|
|
// make the damage area as big as the table, similarly to the way the cell map decides whether
|
|
// to rebuild versus expand. This could be optimized to expand to the smallest area that contains
|
|
// no spanners, but it may not be worth the effort in general, and it would need to be done in the
|
|
// cell map as well.
|
|
PRBool haveSpanner = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if ((dStartX > 0) || (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) || (dStartY > 0) || (dEndY < (numRows - 1))) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
// Scope outside loop to be used as hint.
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap = nsnull;
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length(); rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
PRInt32 rgStartY = rgFrame->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
PRInt32 rgEndY = rgStartY + rgFrame->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
if (dEndY < rgStartY)
|
|
break;
|
|
cellMap = tableCellMap->GetMapFor(rgFrame, cellMap);
|
|
if (!cellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
// check for spanners from above and below
|
|
if ((dStartY > 0) && (dStartY >= rgStartY) && (dStartY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
if (PRUint32(dStartY - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[dStartY - rgStartY];
|
|
for (PRInt32 x = dStartX; x <= dEndX; x++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(x);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsRowSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = PR_TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndY < rgEndY) {
|
|
if (PRUint32(dEndY + 1 - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row2 =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[dEndY + 1 - rgStartY];
|
|
for (PRInt32 x = dStartX; x <= dEndX; x++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row2.SafeElementAt(x);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsRowSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = PR_TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// check for spanners on the left and right
|
|
PRInt32 iterStartY = -1;
|
|
PRInt32 iterEndY = -1;
|
|
if ((dStartY >= rgStartY) && (dStartY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area starts in the row group
|
|
iterStartY = dStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = PR_MIN(dEndY, rgEndY);
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((dEndY >= rgStartY) && (dEndY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area ends in the row group
|
|
iterStartY = rgStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = PR_MIN(dEndY, rgStartY);
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((rgStartY >= dStartY) && (rgEndY <= dEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area contains the row group
|
|
iterStartY = rgStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = rgEndY;
|
|
}
|
|
if ((iterStartY >= 0) && (iterEndY >= 0)) {
|
|
for (PRInt32 y = iterStartY; y <= iterEndY; y++) {
|
|
if (PRUint32(y - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[y - rgStartY];
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(dStartX);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsColSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = PR_TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) {
|
|
cellData = row.SafeElementAt(dEndX + 1);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsColSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = PR_TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (haveSpanner) {
|
|
// make the damage area the whole table
|
|
aRect.x = 0;
|
|
aRect.y = 0;
|
|
aRect.width = numCols;
|
|
aRect.height = numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
aRect.x = dStartX;
|
|
aRect.y = dStartY;
|
|
aRect.width = 1 + dEndX - dStartX;
|
|
aRect.height = 1 + dEndY - dStartY;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#define MAX_TABLE_BORDER_WIDTH 255
|
|
static PRUint8
|
|
LimitBorderWidth(PRUint16 aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
return PR_MIN(MAX_TABLE_BORDER_WIDTH, aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* Here is the order for storing border edges in the cell map as a cell is processed. There are
|
|
n=colspan top and bottom border edges per cell and n=rowspan left and right border edges per cell.
|
|
|
|
1) On the top edge of the table, store the top edge. Never store the top edge otherwise, since
|
|
a bottom edge from a cell above will take care of it.
|
|
2) On the left edge of the table, store the left edge. Never store the left edge othewise, since
|
|
a right edge from a cell to the left will take care of it.
|
|
3) Store the right edge (or edges if a row span)
|
|
4) Store the bottom edge (or edges if a col span)
|
|
|
|
Since corners are computed with only an array of BCCornerInfo indexed by the number-of-cols, corner
|
|
calculations are somewhat complicated. Using an array with number-of-rows * number-of-col entries
|
|
would simplify this, but at an extra in memory cost of nearly 12 bytes per cell map entry. Collapsing
|
|
borders already have about an extra 8 byte per cell map entry overhead (this could be
|
|
reduced to 4 bytes if we are willing to not store border widths in nsTableCellFrame), Here are the
|
|
rules in priority order for storing cornes in the cell map as a cell is processed. top-left means the
|
|
left endpoint of the border edge on the top of the cell. There are n=colspan top and bottom border
|
|
edges per cell and n=rowspan left and right border edges per cell.
|
|
|
|
1) On the top edge of the table, store the top-left corner, unless on the left edge of the table.
|
|
Never store the top-right corner, since it will get stored as a right-top corner.
|
|
2) On the left edge of the table, store the left-top corner. Never store the left-bottom corner,
|
|
since it will get stored as a bottom-left corner.
|
|
3) Store the right-top corner if (a) it is the top right corner of the table or (b) it is not on
|
|
the top edge of the table. Never store the right-bottom corner since it will get stored as a
|
|
bottom-right corner.
|
|
4) Store the bottom-right corner, if it is the bottom right corner of the table. Never store it
|
|
otherwise, since it will get stored as either a right-top corner by a cell below or
|
|
a bottom-left corner from a cell to the right.
|
|
5) Store the bottom-left corner, if (a) on the bottom edge of the table or (b) if the left edge hits
|
|
the top side of a colspan in its interior. Never store the corner otherwise, since it will
|
|
get stored as a right-top corner by a cell from below.
|
|
|
|
XXX the BC-RTL hack - The correct fix would be a rewrite as described in bug 203686.
|
|
In order to draw borders in rtl conditions somehow correct, the existing structure which relies
|
|
heavily on the assumption that the next cell sibling will be on the right side, has been modified.
|
|
We flip the border during painting and during style lookup. Look for tableIsLTR for places where
|
|
the flipping is done.
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
#define TABLE_EDGE PR_TRUE
|
|
#define ADJACENT PR_TRUE
|
|
#define HORIZONTAL PR_TRUE
|
|
|
|
// Calc the dominant border at every cell edge and corner within the current damage area
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcBCBorders()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IsBorderCollapse(),
|
|
"calling CalcBCBorders on separated-border table");
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
PRInt32 numRows = GetRowCount();
|
|
PRInt32 numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
if (!numRows || !numCols)
|
|
return; // nothing to do
|
|
|
|
// Get the property holding the table damage area and border widths
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData =
|
|
(BCPropertyData*)nsTableFrame::GetProperty(this, nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty, PR_FALSE);
|
|
if (!propData) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
PRBool tableIsLTR = GetStyleVisibility()->mDirection == NS_STYLE_DIRECTION_LTR;
|
|
PRUint8 firstSide, secondSide;
|
|
if (tableIsLTR) {
|
|
firstSide = NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
secondSide = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
firstSide = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
secondSide = NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
}
|
|
CheckFixDamageArea(numRows, numCols, propData->mDamageArea);
|
|
// calculate an expanded damage area
|
|
nsRect damageArea(propData->mDamageArea);
|
|
ExpandBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
|
|
// segments that are on the table border edges need to be initialized only once
|
|
PRBool tableBorderReset[4];
|
|
for (PRUint32 sideX = NS_SIDE_TOP; sideX <= NS_SIDE_LEFT; sideX++) {
|
|
tableBorderReset[sideX] = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// vertical borders indexed in x-direction (cols)
|
|
BCCellBorders lastVerBorders(damageArea.width + 1, damageArea.x); if (!lastVerBorders.borders) ABORT0();
|
|
BCCellBorder lastTopBorder, lastBottomBorder;
|
|
// horizontal borders indexed in x-direction (cols)
|
|
BCCellBorders lastBottomBorders(damageArea.width + 1, damageArea.x); if (!lastBottomBorders.borders) ABORT0();
|
|
PRBool startSeg;
|
|
PRBool gotRowBorder = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellInfo info, ajaInfo;
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder, adjacentBorder;
|
|
PRInt32 cellEndRowIndex = -1;
|
|
PRInt32 cellEndColIndex = -1;
|
|
BCCorners topCorners(damageArea.width + 1, damageArea.x); if (!topCorners.corners) ABORT0();
|
|
BCCorners bottomCorners(damageArea.width + 1, damageArea.x); if (!bottomCorners.corners) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellIterator iter(*this, damageArea);
|
|
for (iter.First(info); !iter.mAtEnd; iter.Next(info)) {
|
|
|
|
cellEndRowIndex = info.rowIndex + info.rowSpan - 1;
|
|
cellEndColIndex = info.colIndex + info.colSpan - 1;
|
|
|
|
PRBool bottomRowSpan = PR_FALSE;
|
|
// see if lastTopBorder, lastBottomBorder need to be reset
|
|
if (iter.IsNewRow()) {
|
|
gotRowBorder = PR_FALSE;
|
|
lastTopBorder.Reset(info.rowIndex, info.rowSpan);
|
|
lastBottomBorder.Reset(cellEndRowIndex + 1, info.rowSpan);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (info.colIndex > damageArea.x) {
|
|
lastBottomBorder = lastBottomBorders[info.colIndex - 1];
|
|
if (info.rowIndex > lastBottomBorder.rowIndex - lastBottomBorder.rowSpan) {
|
|
// the top border's left edge butts against the middle of a rowspan
|
|
lastTopBorder.Reset(info.rowIndex, info.rowSpan);
|
|
}
|
|
if (lastBottomBorder.rowIndex > (cellEndRowIndex + 1)) {
|
|
// the bottom border's left edge butts against the middle of a rowspan
|
|
lastBottomBorder.Reset(cellEndRowIndex + 1, info.rowSpan);
|
|
bottomRowSpan = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's top border and the table, row group, row
|
|
// if the border is at the top of the table, otherwise it was processed in a previous row
|
|
if (0 == info.rowIndex) {
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_TOP]) {
|
|
propData->mTopBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_TOP] = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = info.colIndex; colX <= cellEndColIndex; colX++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colX); if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* cgFrame = colFrame->GetParent(); if (!cgFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, cgFrame, colFrame, info.rg, info.topRow,
|
|
info.cell, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
// update/store the top left & top right corners of the seg
|
|
BCCornerInfo& tlCorner = topCorners[colX]; // top left
|
|
if (0 == colX) {
|
|
tlCorner.Set(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder); // we are on right hand side of the corner
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
tlCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eTopLeft, *info.cellMap, 0, 0, colX,
|
|
tlCorner.ownerSide, tlCorner.subWidth, tlCorner.bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
topCorners[colX + 1].Set(NS_SIDE_LEFT, currentBorder); // top right
|
|
// update lastTopBorder and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetHorBorder(currentBorder, tlCorner, lastTopBorder);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_TOP, *info.cellMap, 0, 0, colX,
|
|
1, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the affected borders of the cell, row, and table
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.topRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_BOTTOM_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.topRow->SetTopBCBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.topRow->GetTopBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
propData->mTopBorderWidth = LimitBorderWidth(PR_MAX(propData->mTopBorderWidth, (PRUint8)currentBorder.width));
|
|
//calculate column continuous borders
|
|
//we only need to do this once, so we'll do it only on the first row
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, cgFrame, colFrame, info.rg,
|
|
info.topRow, nsnull, tableIsLTR,
|
|
TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP, !ADJACENT);
|
|
((nsTableColFrame*)colFrame)->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
if (numCols == cellEndColIndex + 1) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, cgFrame, colFrame, nsnull,
|
|
nsnull, nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE,
|
|
NS_SIDE_RIGHT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, cgFrame, colFrame, nsnull,
|
|
nsnull, nsnull, tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE,
|
|
NS_SIDE_RIGHT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
((nsTableColFrame*)colFrame)->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_RIGHT,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
//calculate continuous top first row & rowgroup border: special case
|
|
//because it must include the table in the collapse
|
|
if (info.topRow) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, nsnull, nsnull, info.rg,
|
|
info.topRow, nsnull, tableIsLTR,
|
|
TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP, !ADJACENT);
|
|
info.topRow->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.cgRight && info.cg) {
|
|
//calculate continuous top colgroup border once per colgroup
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, nsnull, info.rg,
|
|
info.topRow, nsnull, tableIsLTR,
|
|
TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP, !ADJACENT);
|
|
info.cg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (0 == info.colIndex) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.leftCol, nsnull,
|
|
nsnull, nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE,
|
|
NS_SIDE_LEFT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mBits.mLeftContBCBorder = currentBorder.width;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// see if the top border needs to be the start of a segment due to a vertical border owning the corner
|
|
if (info.colIndex > 0) {
|
|
BCData& data = ((BCCellData*)info.cellData)->mData;
|
|
if (!data.IsTopStart()) {
|
|
PRUint8 cornerSide;
|
|
PRPackedBool bevel;
|
|
data.GetCorner(cornerSide, bevel);
|
|
if ((NS_SIDE_TOP == cornerSide) || (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM == cornerSide)) {
|
|
data.SetTopStart(PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's left border and the table, col group, col
|
|
// if the border is at the left of the table, otherwise it was processed in a previous col
|
|
if (0 == info.colIndex) {
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_LEFT]) {
|
|
propData->mLeftBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_LEFT] = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = nsnull;
|
|
for (PRInt32 rowX = info.rowIndex; rowX <= cellEndRowIndex; rowX++) {
|
|
rowFrame = (rowX == info.rowIndex) ? info.topRow : rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.leftCol, info.rg, rowFrame, info.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_LEFT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& tlCorner = (0 == rowX) ? topCorners[0] : bottomCorners[0]; // top left
|
|
tlCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eTopLeft, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
0, tlCorner.ownerSide, tlCorner.subWidth, tlCorner.bevel);
|
|
bottomCorners[0].Set(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder); // bottom left
|
|
// update lastVerBordersBorder and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder, lastVerBorders[0]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_LEFT, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
info.colIndex, 1, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the left border of the cell, col and table
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(firstSide, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(firstSide)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.leftCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_RIGHT_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.leftCol->SetLeftBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.leftCol->GetLeftBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
propData->mLeftBorderWidth = LimitBorderWidth(PR_MAX(propData->mLeftBorderWidth, currentBorder.width));
|
|
//get row continuous borders
|
|
if (rowFrame) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.leftCol,
|
|
info.rg, rowFrame, nsnull, tableIsLTR,
|
|
TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_LEFT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
rowFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(firstSide, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
//get row group continuous borders
|
|
if (info.rgBottom && info.rg) { //once per row group, so check for bottom
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.leftCol, info.rg, nsnull,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_LEFT,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
info.rg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(firstSide, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's right border, adjacent cells and the table, row group, row
|
|
if (numCols == cellEndColIndex + 1) { // touches right edge of table
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_RIGHT]) {
|
|
propData->mRightBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_RIGHT] = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = nsnull;
|
|
for (PRInt32 rowX = info.rowIndex; rowX <= cellEndRowIndex; rowX++) {
|
|
rowFrame = (rowX == info.rowIndex) ? info.topRow : rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.rightCol, info.rg, rowFrame, info.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_RIGHT, ADJACENT);
|
|
// update/store the top right & bottom right corners
|
|
BCCornerInfo& trCorner = (0 == rowX) ? topCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1] : bottomCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1];
|
|
trCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder); // top right
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eTopRight, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
cellEndColIndex, trCorner.ownerSide, trCorner.subWidth, trCorner.bevel);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bottomCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1];
|
|
brCorner.Set(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder); // bottom right
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomRight, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
cellEndColIndex, brCorner.ownerSide, brCorner.subWidth, brCorner.bevel);
|
|
// update lastVerBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder, lastVerBorders[cellEndColIndex + 1]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
cellEndColIndex, 1, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the affected borders of the cell, col, and table
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(secondSide, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(secondSide)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.rightCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_LEFT_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.rightCol->SetRightBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.rightCol->GetRightBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
propData->mRightBorderWidth = LimitBorderWidth(PR_MAX(propData->mRightBorderWidth, currentBorder.width));
|
|
//get row continuous borders
|
|
if (rowFrame) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.rightCol, info.rg,
|
|
rowFrame, nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE,
|
|
NS_SIDE_RIGHT, ADJACENT);
|
|
rowFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(secondSide, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
//get row group continuous borders
|
|
if (info.rgBottom && info.rg) { //once per rg, so check for bottom
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, info.rightCol, info.rg,
|
|
nsnull, nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE,
|
|
NS_SIDE_RIGHT, ADJACENT);
|
|
info.rg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(secondSide, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
PRInt32 segLength = 0;
|
|
BCMapCellInfo priorAjaInfo;
|
|
for (PRInt32 rowX = info.rowIndex; rowX <= cellEndRowIndex; rowX += segLength) {
|
|
iter.PeekRight(info, rowX, ajaInfo);
|
|
const nsIFrame* cg = (info.cgRight) ? info.cg : nsnull;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, cg, info.rightCol, nsnull, nsnull, info.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_RIGHT, ADJACENT);
|
|
cg = (ajaInfo.cgLeft) ? ajaInfo.cg : nsnull;
|
|
adjacentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, cg, ajaInfo.leftCol, nsnull, nsnull, ajaInfo.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_LEFT, !ADJACENT);
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder, adjacentBorder, !HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
|
segLength = PR_MAX(1, ajaInfo.rowIndex + ajaInfo.rowSpan - rowX);
|
|
segLength = PR_MIN(segLength, info.rowIndex + info.rowSpan - rowX);
|
|
|
|
// update lastVerBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder, lastVerBorders[cellEndColIndex + 1]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
if (cellEndColIndex < damageArea.XMost() && rowX >= damageArea.y && rowX < damageArea.YMost()) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX,
|
|
cellEndColIndex, segLength, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the borders of the cells and cols affected
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(secondSide, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(secondSide)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.rightCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_LEFT_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.rightCol->SetRightBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.rightCol->GetRightBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
if (ajaInfo.cell) {
|
|
ajaInfo.cell->SetBorderWidth(firstSide, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, ajaInfo.cell->GetBorderWidth(firstSide)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (ajaInfo.leftCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_RIGHT_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
ajaInfo.leftCol->SetLeftBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, ajaInfo.leftCol->GetLeftBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update the top right corner
|
|
PRBool hitsSpanOnRight = (rowX > ajaInfo.rowIndex) && (rowX < ajaInfo.rowIndex + ajaInfo.rowSpan);
|
|
BCCornerInfo* trCorner = ((0 == rowX) || hitsSpanOnRight)
|
|
? &topCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1] : &bottomCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1];
|
|
trCorner->Update(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder);
|
|
// if this is not the first time through, consider the segment to the right
|
|
if (rowX != info.rowIndex) {
|
|
const nsIFrame* rg = (priorAjaInfo.rgBottom) ? priorAjaInfo.rg : nsnull;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, priorAjaInfo.bottomRow, priorAjaInfo.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, ADJACENT);
|
|
rg = (ajaInfo.rgTop) ? ajaInfo.rg : nsnull;
|
|
adjacentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, ajaInfo.topRow, ajaInfo.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP, !ADJACENT);
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder, adjacentBorder, HORIZONTAL);
|
|
trCorner->Update(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
// store the top right corner in the cell map
|
|
if (cellEndColIndex < damageArea.XMost() && rowX >= damageArea.y) {
|
|
if (0 != rowX) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eTopRight, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rowX, cellEndColIndex,
|
|
trCorner->ownerSide, trCorner->subWidth, trCorner->bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
// store any corners this cell spans together with the aja cell
|
|
for (PRInt32 rX = rowX + 1; rX < rowX + segLength; rX++) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomRight, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, rX,
|
|
cellEndColIndex, trCorner->ownerSide, trCorner->subWidth, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update bottom right corner, topCorners, bottomCorners
|
|
hitsSpanOnRight = (rowX + segLength < ajaInfo.rowIndex + ajaInfo.rowSpan);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = (hitsSpanOnRight) ? topCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1]
|
|
: bottomCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1];
|
|
brCorner.Set(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder);
|
|
priorAjaInfo = ajaInfo;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = info.colIndex + 1; colX <= cellEndColIndex; colX++) {
|
|
lastVerBorders[colX].Reset(0,1);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's bottom border, adjacent cells and the table, row group, row
|
|
if (numRows == cellEndRowIndex + 1) { // touches bottom edge of table
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_BOTTOM]) {
|
|
propData->mBottomBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[NS_SIDE_BOTTOM] = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = info.colIndex; colX <= cellEndColIndex; colX++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colX); if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* cgFrame = colFrame->GetParent(); if (!cgFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, cgFrame, colFrame, info.rg, info.bottomRow, info.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, ADJACENT);
|
|
// update/store the bottom left & bottom right corners
|
|
BCCornerInfo& blCorner = bottomCorners[colX]; // bottom left
|
|
blCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomLeft, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
colX, blCorner.ownerSide, blCorner.subWidth, blCorner.bevel);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bottomCorners[colX + 1]; // bottom right
|
|
brCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_LEFT, currentBorder);
|
|
if (numCols == colX + 1) { // lower right corner of the table
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomRight, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
colX, brCorner.ownerSide, brCorner.subWidth, brCorner.bevel, PR_TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
// update lastBottomBorder and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetHorBorder(currentBorder, blCorner, lastBottomBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
// make sure that we did not compare apples to oranges i.e. the current border
|
|
// should be a continuation of the lastBottomBorder, as it is a bottom border
|
|
// add 1 to the cellEndRowIndex
|
|
startSeg = (lastBottomBorder.rowIndex != cellEndRowIndex + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
colX, 1, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the bottom borders of the cell, the bottom row, and the table
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.bottomRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_TOP_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.bottomRow->SetBottomBCBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.bottomRow->GetBottomBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
propData->mBottomBorderWidth = LimitBorderWidth(PR_MAX(propData->mBottomBorderWidth, currentBorder.width));
|
|
// update lastBottomBorders
|
|
lastBottomBorder.rowIndex = cellEndRowIndex + 1;
|
|
lastBottomBorder.rowSpan = info.rowSpan;
|
|
lastBottomBorders[colX] = lastBottomBorder;
|
|
//get col continuous border
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, cgFrame, colFrame, info.rg, info.bottomRow,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
((nsTableColFrame*)colFrame)->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
//get row group/col group continuous border
|
|
if (info.rg) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, nsnull, nsnull, info.rg, info.bottomRow,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
info.rg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.cg) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(this, info.cg, nsnull, info.rg, info.bottomRow,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
info.cg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
PRInt32 segLength = 0;
|
|
for (PRInt32 colX = info.colIndex; colX <= cellEndColIndex; colX += segLength) {
|
|
iter.PeekBottom(info, colX, ajaInfo);
|
|
const nsIFrame* rg = (info.rgBottom) ? info.rg : nsnull;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, info.bottomRow, info.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, ADJACENT);
|
|
rg = (ajaInfo.rgTop) ? ajaInfo.rg : nsnull;
|
|
adjacentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, ajaInfo.topRow, ajaInfo.cell,
|
|
tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP, !ADJACENT);
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder, adjacentBorder, HORIZONTAL);
|
|
segLength = PR_MAX(1, ajaInfo.colIndex + ajaInfo.colSpan - colX);
|
|
segLength = PR_MIN(segLength, info.colIndex + info.colSpan - colX);
|
|
|
|
// update, store the bottom left corner
|
|
BCCornerInfo& blCorner = bottomCorners[colX]; // bottom left
|
|
PRBool hitsSpanBelow = (colX > ajaInfo.colIndex) && (colX < ajaInfo.colIndex + ajaInfo.colSpan);
|
|
PRBool update = PR_TRUE;
|
|
if ((colX == info.colIndex) && (colX > damageArea.x)) {
|
|
PRInt32 prevRowIndex = lastBottomBorders[colX - 1].rowIndex;
|
|
if (prevRowIndex > cellEndRowIndex + 1) { // hits a rowspan on the right
|
|
update = PR_FALSE; // the corner was taken care of during the cell on the left
|
|
}
|
|
else if (prevRowIndex < cellEndRowIndex + 1) { // spans below the cell to the left
|
|
topCorners[colX] = blCorner;
|
|
blCorner.Set(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
update = PR_FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (update) {
|
|
blCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellEndRowIndex < damageArea.YMost() && colX >= damageArea.x) {
|
|
if (hitsSpanBelow) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomLeft, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex, colX,
|
|
blCorner.ownerSide, blCorner.subWidth, blCorner.bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
// store any corners this cell spans together with the aja cell
|
|
for (PRInt32 cX = colX + 1; cX < colX + segLength; cX++) {
|
|
BCCornerInfo& corner = bottomCorners[cX];
|
|
corner.Set(NS_SIDE_RIGHT, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBottomLeft, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
cX, corner.ownerSide, corner.subWidth, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update lastBottomBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetHorBorder(currentBorder, blCorner, lastBottomBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
// make sure that we did not compare apples to oranges i.e. the current border
|
|
// should be a continuation of the lastBottomBorder, as it is a bottom border
|
|
// add 1 to the cellEndRowIndex
|
|
startSeg = (lastBottomBorder.rowIndex != cellEndRowIndex + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
lastBottomBorder.rowIndex = cellEndRowIndex + 1;
|
|
lastBottomBorder.rowSpan = info.rowSpan;
|
|
for (PRInt32 cX = colX; cX < colX + segLength; cX++) {
|
|
lastBottomBorders[cX] = lastBottomBorder;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// store the border segment the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
if (cellEndRowIndex < damageArea.YMost() && colX >= damageArea.x && colX < damageArea.XMost()) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, *info.cellMap, iter.mRowGroupStart, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
colX, segLength, currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update the borders of the affected cells and rows
|
|
if (info.cell) {
|
|
info.cell->SetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, info.cell->GetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.bottomRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_TOP_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.bottomRow->SetBottomBCBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, info.bottomRow->GetBottomBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
if (ajaInfo.cell) {
|
|
ajaInfo.cell->SetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP, PR_MAX(currentBorder.width, ajaInfo.cell->GetBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (ajaInfo.topRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_BOTTOM_HALF(currentBorder.width);
|
|
ajaInfo.topRow->SetTopBCBorderWidth(PR_MAX(half, ajaInfo.topRow->GetTopBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update bottom right corner
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bottomCorners[colX + segLength];
|
|
brCorner.Update(NS_SIDE_LEFT, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
if (!gotRowBorder && 1 == info.rowSpan && (ajaInfo.topRow || info.rgBottom)) {
|
|
//get continuous row/row group border
|
|
//we need to check the row group's bottom border if this is
|
|
//the last row in the row group, but only a cell with rowspan=1
|
|
//will know whether *this* row is at the bottom
|
|
const nsIFrame* rg = (info.rgBottom) ? info.rg : nsnull;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, info.bottomRow,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_BOTTOM,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
rg = (ajaInfo.rgTop) ? ajaInfo.rg : nsnull;
|
|
adjacentBorder = CompareBorders(nsnull, nsnull, nsnull, rg, ajaInfo.topRow,
|
|
nsnull, tableIsLTR, !TABLE_EDGE, NS_SIDE_TOP,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(PR_FALSE, currentBorder, adjacentBorder, HORIZONTAL);
|
|
if (ajaInfo.topRow) {
|
|
ajaInfo.topRow->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_TOP, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.rgBottom && info.rg) {
|
|
info.rg->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
gotRowBorder = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// see if the cell to the right had a rowspan and its lower left border needs be joined with this one's bottom
|
|
if ((numCols != cellEndColIndex + 1) && // there is a cell to the right
|
|
(lastBottomBorders[cellEndColIndex + 1].rowSpan > 1)) { // cell to right was a rowspan
|
|
BCCornerInfo& corner = bottomCorners[cellEndColIndex + 1];
|
|
if ((NS_SIDE_TOP != corner.ownerSide) && (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM != corner.ownerSide)) { // not a vertical owner
|
|
BCCellBorder& thisBorder = lastBottomBorder;
|
|
BCCellBorder& nextBorder = lastBottomBorders[info.colIndex + 1];
|
|
if ((thisBorder.color == nextBorder.color) && (thisBorder.width == nextBorder.width) &&
|
|
(thisBorder.style == nextBorder.style)) {
|
|
// set the flag on the next border indicating it is not the start of a new segment
|
|
if (iter.mCellMap) {
|
|
BCData* bcData = tableCellMap->GetBCData(NS_SIDE_BOTTOM, *iter.mCellMap, cellEndRowIndex,
|
|
cellEndColIndex + 1);
|
|
if (bcData) {
|
|
bcData->SetTopStart(PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
} // for (iter.First(info); info.cell; iter.Next(info)) {
|
|
|
|
// reset the bc flag and damage area
|
|
SetNeedToCalcBCBorders(PR_FALSE);
|
|
propData->mDamageArea.x = propData->mDamageArea.y = propData->mDamageArea.width = propData->mDamageArea.height = 0;
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
mCellMap->Dump();
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Iterates over borders (left border, corner, top border) in the cell map within a damage area
|
|
// from left to right, top to bottom. All members are in terms of the 1st in flow frames, except
|
|
// where suffixed by InFlow.
|
|
class BCMapBorderIterator
|
|
{
|
|
public:
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame& aRowFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea);
|
|
void Reset(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame& aRowFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea);
|
|
void First();
|
|
void Next();
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* table;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap;
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap;
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* prevRg;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg;
|
|
PRInt32 rowGroupIndex;
|
|
PRInt32 fifRowGroupStart;
|
|
PRInt32 rowGroupStart;
|
|
PRInt32 rowGroupEnd;
|
|
PRInt32 numRows; // number of rows in the table and all continuations
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* prevRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* row;
|
|
PRInt32 numCols;
|
|
PRInt32 x;
|
|
PRInt32 y;
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* prevCell;
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* cell;
|
|
BCCellData* prevCellData;
|
|
BCCellData* cellData;
|
|
BCData* bcData;
|
|
|
|
PRBool IsTopMostTable() { return (y == 0) && !table->GetPrevInFlow(); }
|
|
PRBool IsRightMostTable() { return (x >= numCols); }
|
|
PRBool IsBottomMostTable() { return (y >= numRows) && !table->GetNextInFlow(); }
|
|
PRBool IsLeftMostTable() { return (x == 0); }
|
|
PRBool IsTopMost() { return (y == startY); }
|
|
PRBool IsRightMost() { return (x >= endX); }
|
|
PRBool IsBottomMost() { return (y >= endY); }
|
|
PRBool IsLeftMost() { return (x == startX); }
|
|
PRBool isNewRow;
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startX;
|
|
PRInt32 startY;
|
|
PRInt32 endX;
|
|
PRInt32 endY;
|
|
PRBool isRepeatedHeader;
|
|
PRBool isRepeatedFooter;
|
|
PRBool atEnd;
|
|
|
|
private:
|
|
|
|
PRBool SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow = nsnull);
|
|
PRBool SetNewRowGroup();
|
|
void SetNewData(PRInt32 aY, PRInt32 aX);
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::BCMapBorderIterator(nsTableFrame& aTable,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroup,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame& aRow,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea)
|
|
{
|
|
Reset(aTable, aRowGroup, aRow, aDamageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::Reset(nsTableFrame& aTable,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame& aRowGroup,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame& aRow,
|
|
const nsRect& aDamageArea)
|
|
{
|
|
atEnd = PR_TRUE; // gets reset when First() is called
|
|
|
|
table = &aTable;
|
|
rg = &aRowGroup;
|
|
prevRow = nsnull;
|
|
row = &aRow;
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFif = (nsTableFrame*)table->GetFirstInFlow(); if (!tableFif) ABORT0();
|
|
tableCellMap = tableFif->GetCellMap();
|
|
|
|
startX = aDamageArea.x;
|
|
startY = aDamageArea.y;
|
|
endY = aDamageArea.y + aDamageArea.height;
|
|
endX = aDamageArea.x + aDamageArea.width;
|
|
|
|
numRows = tableFif->GetRowCount();
|
|
y = 0;
|
|
numCols = tableFif->GetColCount();
|
|
x = 0;
|
|
rowGroupIndex = -1;
|
|
prevCell = nsnull;
|
|
cell = nsnull;
|
|
prevCellData = nsnull;
|
|
cellData = nsnull;
|
|
bcData = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
table->OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::SetNewData(PRInt32 aY,
|
|
PRInt32 aX)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!tableCellMap || !tableCellMap->mBCInfo) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
x = aX;
|
|
y = aY;
|
|
prevCellData = cellData;
|
|
if (IsRightMost() && IsBottomMost()) {
|
|
cell = nsnull;
|
|
bcData = &tableCellMap->mBCInfo->mLowerRightCorner;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (IsRightMost()) {
|
|
cellData = nsnull;
|
|
bcData = (BCData*)tableCellMap->mBCInfo->mRightBorders.ElementAt(aY);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (IsBottomMost()) {
|
|
cellData = nsnull;
|
|
bcData = (BCData*)tableCellMap->mBCInfo->mBottomBorders.ElementAt(aX);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (PRUint32(y - fifRowGroupStart) < cellMap->mRows.Length()) {
|
|
bcData = nsnull;
|
|
cellData =
|
|
(BCCellData*)cellMap->mRows[y - fifRowGroupStart].SafeElementAt(x);
|
|
if (cellData) {
|
|
bcData = &cellData->mData;
|
|
if (!cellData->IsOrig()) {
|
|
if (cellData->IsRowSpan()) {
|
|
aY -= cellData->GetRowSpanOffset();
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData->IsColSpan()) {
|
|
aX -= cellData->GetColSpanOffset();
|
|
}
|
|
if ((aX >= 0) && (aY >= 0)) {
|
|
cellData = (BCCellData*)cellMap->mRows[aY - fifRowGroupStart][aX];
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData->IsOrig()) {
|
|
prevCell = cell;
|
|
cell = cellData->GetCellFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow)
|
|
{
|
|
prevRow = row;
|
|
row = (aRow) ? aRow : row->GetNextRow();
|
|
|
|
if (row) {
|
|
isNewRow = PR_TRUE;
|
|
y = row->GetRowIndex();
|
|
x = startX;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
atEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
return !atEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
PRBool
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::SetNewRowGroup()
|
|
{
|
|
rowGroupIndex++;
|
|
|
|
isRepeatedHeader = PR_FALSE;
|
|
isRepeatedFooter = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (rowGroupIndex < rowGroups.Length()) {
|
|
prevRg = rg;
|
|
rg = rowGroups[rowGroupIndex];
|
|
fifRowGroupStart = ((nsTableRowGroupFrame*)rg->GetFirstInFlow())->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
rowGroupStart = rg->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
rowGroupEnd = rowGroupStart + rg->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
|
|
if (SetNewRow(rg->GetFirstRow())) {
|
|
cellMap =
|
|
tableCellMap->GetMapFor((nsTableRowGroupFrame*)rg->GetFirstInFlow(),
|
|
nsnull);
|
|
if (!cellMap) ABORT1(PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (rg && table->GetPrevInFlow() && !rg->GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
// if rg doesn't have a prev in flow, then it may be a repeated header or footer
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = rg->GetStyleDisplay();
|
|
if (y == startY) {
|
|
isRepeatedHeader = (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP == display->mDisplay);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
isRepeatedFooter = (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP == display->mDisplay);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
atEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
return !atEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::First()
|
|
{
|
|
if (!table || (startX >= numCols) || (startY >= numRows)) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
atEnd = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
PRUint32 numRowGroups = rowGroups.Length();
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < numRowGroups; rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowG = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
PRInt32 start = rowG->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
PRInt32 end = start + rowG->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
if ((startY >= start) && (startY <= end)) {
|
|
rowGroupIndex = rgX - 1; // SetNewRowGroup increments rowGroupIndex
|
|
if (SetNewRowGroup()) {
|
|
while ((y < startY) && !atEnd) {
|
|
SetNewRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (!atEnd) {
|
|
SetNewData(startY, startX);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
atEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator::Next()
|
|
{
|
|
if (atEnd) ABORT0();
|
|
isNewRow = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
x++;
|
|
if (x > endX) {
|
|
y++;
|
|
if (y == endY) {
|
|
x = startX;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (y < endY) {
|
|
if (y <= rowGroupEnd) {
|
|
SetNewRow();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
SetNewRowGroup();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
atEnd = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!atEnd) {
|
|
SetNewData(y, x);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX if CalcVerCornerOffset and CalcHorCornerOffset remain similar, combine them
|
|
static nscoord
|
|
CalcVerCornerOffset(PRUint8 aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
nscoord aCornerSubWidth,
|
|
nscoord aHorWidth,
|
|
PRBool aIsStartOfSeg,
|
|
PRBool aIsBevel)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord offset = 0;
|
|
// XXX These should be replaced with appropriate side-specific macros (which?).
|
|
nscoord smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
if ((NS_SIDE_TOP == aCornerOwnerSide) || (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM == aCornerOwnerSide)) {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aCornerSubWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (NS_SIDE_TOP == aCornerOwnerSide) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aHorWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(offset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Compute the horizontal offset of a horizontal border segment
|
|
* @param aCornerOwnerSide - which side owns the corner
|
|
* @param aCornerSubWidth - how wide is the nonwinning side of the corner
|
|
* @param aVerWidth - how wide is the vertical edge of the corner
|
|
* @param aIsStartOfSeg - does this corner start a new segment
|
|
* @param aIsBevel - is this corner beveled
|
|
* @param aPixelsToTwips - conversion factor
|
|
* @param aTableIsLTR - direction, the computation depends on ltr or rtl
|
|
* @return - offset in pixel
|
|
*/
|
|
static nscoord
|
|
CalcHorCornerOffset(PRUint8 aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
nscoord aCornerSubWidth,
|
|
nscoord aVerWidth,
|
|
PRBool aIsStartOfSeg,
|
|
PRBool aIsBevel,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord offset = 0;
|
|
// XXX These should be replaced with appropriate side-specific macros (which?).
|
|
nscoord smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
if ((NS_SIDE_LEFT == aCornerOwnerSide) || (NS_SIDE_RIGHT == aCornerOwnerSide)) {
|
|
if (aTableIsLTR) {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aCornerSubWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aCornerSubWidth, largeHalf, smallHalf);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (NS_SIDE_LEFT == aCornerOwnerSide) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (aTableIsLTR) {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aVerWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aVerWidth, largeHalf, smallHalf);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(offset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
struct BCVerticalSeg
|
|
{
|
|
BCVerticalSeg();
|
|
|
|
void Start(BCMapBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
nscoord aVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aPrevHorSegHeight,
|
|
nscoord aHorSegHeight,
|
|
BCVerticalSeg* aVerInfoArray);
|
|
|
|
union {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* col;
|
|
PRInt32 colWidth;
|
|
};
|
|
PRInt32 colX;
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* ajaCell;
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* firstCell; // cell at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* firstRowGroup; // row group at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstRow; // row at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* lastCell; // cell at the current end of the segment
|
|
PRInt32 segY;
|
|
PRInt32 segHeight;
|
|
PRInt16 segWidth; // width in pixels
|
|
PRUint8 owner;
|
|
PRUint8 bevelSide;
|
|
PRUint16 bevelOffset;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCVerticalSeg::BCVerticalSeg()
|
|
{
|
|
col = nsnull; firstCell = lastCell = ajaCell = nsnull; colX = segY = segHeight = 0;
|
|
segWidth = bevelOffset = 0; bevelSide = 0; owner = eCellOwner;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCVerticalSeg::Start(BCMapBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
nscoord aVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aPrevHorSegHeight,
|
|
nscoord aHorSegHeight,
|
|
BCVerticalSeg* aVerInfoArray)
|
|
{
|
|
PRUint8 ownerSide = 0;
|
|
PRPackedBool bevel = PR_FALSE;
|
|
PRInt32 xAdj = aIter.x - aIter.startX;
|
|
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth = (aIter.bcData) ? aIter.bcData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel) : 0;
|
|
PRBool topBevel = (aVerSegWidth > 0) ? bevel : PR_FALSE;
|
|
nscoord maxHorSegHeight = PR_MAX(aPrevHorSegHeight, aHorSegHeight);
|
|
nscoord offset = CalcVerCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, maxHorSegHeight,
|
|
PR_TRUE, topBevel);
|
|
|
|
bevelOffset = (topBevel) ? maxHorSegHeight : 0;
|
|
bevelSide = (aHorSegHeight > 0) ? NS_SIDE_RIGHT : NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
segY += offset;
|
|
segHeight = -offset;
|
|
segWidth = aVerSegWidth;
|
|
owner = aBorderOwner;
|
|
firstCell = aIter.cell;
|
|
firstRowGroup = aIter.rg;
|
|
firstRow = aIter.row;
|
|
if (xAdj > 0) {
|
|
ajaCell = aVerInfoArray[xAdj - 1].lastCell;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
struct BCHorizontalSeg
|
|
{
|
|
BCHorizontalSeg();
|
|
|
|
void Start(BCMapBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
PRUint8 aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
nscoord aSubWidth,
|
|
PRBool aBevel,
|
|
nscoord aTopVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aBottomVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aHorSegHeight,
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* aLastCell,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR);
|
|
|
|
nscoord x;
|
|
nscoord y;
|
|
nscoord width;
|
|
nscoord height;
|
|
PRBool leftBevel;
|
|
nscoord leftBevelOffset;
|
|
PRUint8 leftBevelSide;
|
|
PRUint8 owner;
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* firstCell; // cell at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* ajaCell;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCHorizontalSeg::BCHorizontalSeg()
|
|
{
|
|
x = y = width = height = leftBevel = leftBevelOffset = leftBevelSide = 0;
|
|
firstCell = ajaCell = nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Initialize a horizontal border segment for painting
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator storing the current and adjacent frames
|
|
* @param aBorderOwner - which frame owns the border
|
|
* @param aCornerOwnerSide - which side owns the starting corner
|
|
* @param aSubWidth - how wide is the nonowning width of the corner
|
|
* @param aBevel - is the corner beveled
|
|
* @param aTopVerSegWidth - vertical segment width going down
|
|
* @param aBottomVerSegWidth - vertical segment width coming from up
|
|
* @param aHorSegHeight - the height of the segment
|
|
* @param aLastCell - cell frame above this segment
|
|
* @param aPixelsToTwips - conversion factor
|
|
* @param aTableIsLTR - direction, the computation depends on ltr or rtl
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCHorizontalSeg::Start(BCMapBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
PRUint8 aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
nscoord aSubWidth,
|
|
PRBool aBevel,
|
|
nscoord aTopVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aBottomVerSegWidth,
|
|
nscoord aHorSegHeight,
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* aLastCell,
|
|
PRBool aTableIsLTR)
|
|
{
|
|
owner = aBorderOwner;
|
|
leftBevel = (aHorSegHeight > 0) ? aBevel : PR_FALSE;
|
|
nscoord maxVerSegWidth = PR_MAX(aTopVerSegWidth, aBottomVerSegWidth);
|
|
nscoord offset = CalcHorCornerOffset(aCornerOwnerSide, aSubWidth, maxVerSegWidth,
|
|
PR_TRUE, leftBevel, aTableIsLTR);
|
|
leftBevelOffset = (leftBevel && (aHorSegHeight > 0)) ? maxVerSegWidth : 0;
|
|
leftBevelSide = (aBottomVerSegWidth > 0) ? NS_SIDE_BOTTOM : NS_SIDE_TOP;
|
|
if (aTableIsLTR) {
|
|
x += offset;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
x -= offset;
|
|
}
|
|
width = -offset;
|
|
height = aHorSegHeight;
|
|
firstCell = aIter.cell;
|
|
ajaCell = (aIter.IsTopMost()) ? nsnull : aLastCell;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PaintBCBorders(nsIRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect)
|
|
{
|
|
nsMargin childAreaOffset = GetChildAreaOffset(nsnull);
|
|
nsTableFrame* firstInFlow = (nsTableFrame*)GetFirstInFlow(); if (!firstInFlow) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startRowY = (GetPrevInFlow()) ? 0 : childAreaOffset.top; // y position of first row in damage area
|
|
|
|
const nsStyleBackground* bgColor = nsCSSRendering::FindNonTransparentBackground(mStyleContext);
|
|
// determine the damage area in terms of rows and columns and finalize startColX and startRowY
|
|
PRUint32 startRowIndex, endRowIndex, startColIndex, endColIndex;
|
|
startRowIndex = endRowIndex = startColIndex = endColIndex = 0;
|
|
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
PRBool done = PR_FALSE;
|
|
PRBool haveIntersect = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* inFlowRG = nsnull;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* inFlowRow = nsnull;
|
|
// find startRowIndex, endRowIndex, startRowY
|
|
PRInt32 rowY = startRowY;
|
|
for (PRUint32 rgX = 0; rgX < rowGroups.Length() && !done; rgX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgX];
|
|
for (nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow(); rowFrame;
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow()) {
|
|
// conservatively estimate the half border widths outside the row
|
|
nscoord topBorderHalf = (GetPrevInFlow()) ? 0 : nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(rowFrame->GetTopBCBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
nscoord bottomBorderHalf = (GetNextInFlow()) ? 0 : nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(rowFrame->GetBottomBCBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
// get the row rect relative to the table rather than the row group
|
|
nsSize rowSize = rowFrame->GetSize();
|
|
if (haveIntersect) {
|
|
if (aDirtyRect.YMost() >= (rowY - topBorderHalf)) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* fifRow = (nsTableRowFrame*)rowFrame->GetFirstInFlow(); if (!fifRow) ABORT0();
|
|
endRowIndex = fifRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
else done = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if ((rowY + rowSize.height + bottomBorderHalf) >= aDirtyRect.y) {
|
|
inFlowRG = rgFrame;
|
|
inFlowRow = rowFrame;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* fifRow = (nsTableRowFrame*)rowFrame->GetFirstInFlow(); if (!fifRow) ABORT0();
|
|
startRowIndex = endRowIndex = fifRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
haveIntersect = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
startRowY += rowSize.height;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
rowY += rowSize.height;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// outer table borders overflow the table, so the table might be
|
|
// target to other areas as the NS_FRAME_OUTSIDE_CHILDREN is set
|
|
// on the table
|
|
if (!haveIntersect)
|
|
return;
|
|
if (!inFlowRG || !inFlowRow) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 startColX;
|
|
// find startColIndex, endColIndex, startColX
|
|
haveIntersect = PR_FALSE;
|
|
PRUint32 numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
if (0 == numCols) return;
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 leftCol, rightCol, colInc; // columns are in the range [leftCol, rightCol)
|
|
PRBool tableIsLTR = GetStyleVisibility()->mDirection == NS_STYLE_DIRECTION_LTR;
|
|
if (tableIsLTR) {
|
|
startColX = childAreaOffset.left; // x position of first col in damage area
|
|
leftCol = 0;
|
|
rightCol = numCols;
|
|
colInc = 1;
|
|
} else {
|
|
startColX = mRect.width - childAreaOffset.right; // x position of first col in damage area
|
|
leftCol = numCols-1;
|
|
rightCol = -1;
|
|
colInc = -1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord x = 0;
|
|
PRInt32 colX;
|
|
for (colX = leftCol; colX != rightCol; colX += colInc) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = firstInFlow->GetColFrame(colX);
|
|
if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
// conservatively estimate the half border widths outside the col
|
|
nscoord leftBorderHalf = nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(colFrame->GetLeftBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
nscoord rightBorderHalf = nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(colFrame->GetRightBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
// get the col rect relative to the table rather than the col group
|
|
nsSize size = colFrame->GetSize();
|
|
if (haveIntersect) {
|
|
if (aDirtyRect.XMost() >= (x - leftBorderHalf)) {
|
|
endColIndex = colX;
|
|
}
|
|
else break;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if ((x + size.width + rightBorderHalf) >= aDirtyRect.x) {
|
|
startColIndex = endColIndex = colX;
|
|
haveIntersect = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
startColX += colInc * size.width;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
x += size.width;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!tableIsLTR) {
|
|
PRUint32 temp;
|
|
startColX = mRect.width - childAreaOffset.right;
|
|
temp = startColIndex; startColIndex = endColIndex; endColIndex = temp;
|
|
for (PRUint32 column = 0; column < startColIndex; column++) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = firstInFlow->GetColFrame(column);
|
|
if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
nsSize size = colFrame->GetSize();
|
|
startColX += colInc * size.width;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!haveIntersect)
|
|
return;
|
|
// iterate the cell map and build up border segments
|
|
nsRect damageArea(startColIndex, startRowIndex,
|
|
1 + PR_ABS(PRInt32(endColIndex - startColIndex)),
|
|
1 + endRowIndex - startRowIndex);
|
|
BCVerticalSeg* verInfo = new BCVerticalSeg[damageArea.width + 1]; if (!verInfo) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
BCBorderOwner borderOwner, ignoreBorderOwner;
|
|
PRUint8 ownerSide;
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
nsRect rowRect(0,0,0,0);
|
|
PRBool isSegStart, ignoreSegStart;
|
|
nscoord prevHorSegHeight = 0;
|
|
PRPackedBool bevel;
|
|
PRInt32 repeatedHeaderY = -99;
|
|
PRBool afterRepeatedHeader = PR_FALSE;
|
|
PRBool startRepeatedFooter = PR_FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// First, paint all of the vertical borders from top to bottom and left to right as they become complete
|
|
// They are painted first, since they are less efficient to paint than horizontal segments. They were
|
|
// stored with as few segments as possible (since horizontal borders are painted last and possibly over them).
|
|
BCMapBorderIterator iter(*this, *inFlowRG, *inFlowRow, damageArea);
|
|
for (iter.First(); !iter.atEnd; iter.Next()) {
|
|
nscoord verSegWidth = (iter.bcData) ? iter.bcData->GetLeftEdge(borderOwner, isSegStart) : 0;
|
|
nscoord horSegHeight = (iter.bcData) ? iter.bcData->GetTopEdge(ignoreBorderOwner, ignoreSegStart) : 0;
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 xAdj = iter.x - iter.startX;
|
|
if (iter.isNewRow) {
|
|
prevHorSegHeight = 0;
|
|
rowRect = iter.row->GetRect();
|
|
if (iter.isRepeatedHeader) {
|
|
repeatedHeaderY = iter.y;
|
|
}
|
|
afterRepeatedHeader = !iter.isRepeatedHeader && (iter.y == (repeatedHeaderY + 1));
|
|
startRepeatedFooter = iter.isRepeatedFooter && (iter.y == iter.rowGroupStart) && (iter.y != iter.startY);
|
|
}
|
|
BCVerticalSeg& info = verInfo[xAdj];
|
|
if (!info.col) { // on the first damaged row and the first segment in the col
|
|
info.col = iter.IsRightMostTable() ? verInfo[xAdj - 1].col : firstInFlow->GetColFrame(iter.x);
|
|
if (!info.col) ABORT0();
|
|
if (0 == xAdj) {
|
|
info.colX = startColX;
|
|
}
|
|
// set colX for the next column
|
|
if (!iter.IsRightMost()) {
|
|
verInfo[xAdj + 1].colX = info.colX + colInc * info.col->GetSize().width;
|
|
}
|
|
info.segY = startRowY;
|
|
info.Start(iter, borderOwner, verSegWidth, prevHorSegHeight, horSegHeight, verInfo);
|
|
info.lastCell = iter.cell;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!iter.IsTopMost() && (isSegStart || iter.IsBottomMost() || afterRepeatedHeader || startRepeatedFooter)) {
|
|
// paint the previous seg or the current one if iter.IsBottomMost()
|
|
if (info.segHeight > 0) {
|
|
if (iter.bcData) {
|
|
cornerSubWidth = iter.bcData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel);
|
|
} else {
|
|
cornerSubWidth = 0;
|
|
ownerSide = 0; // ???
|
|
bevel = PR_FALSE; // ???
|
|
}
|
|
PRBool endBevel = (info.segWidth > 0) ? bevel : PR_FALSE;
|
|
nscoord bottomHorSegHeight = PR_MAX(prevHorSegHeight, horSegHeight);
|
|
nscoord endOffset = CalcVerCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, bottomHorSegHeight,
|
|
PR_FALSE, endBevel);
|
|
info.segHeight += endOffset;
|
|
if (info.segWidth > 0) {
|
|
// get the border style, color and paint the segment
|
|
PRUint8 side = (iter.IsRightMost()) ? NS_SIDE_RIGHT : NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* row = info.firstRow;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowGroup = info.firstRowGroup;
|
|
nsTableColFrame* col = info.col; if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* cell = info.firstCell;
|
|
PRUint8 style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
nscolor color = 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
|
PRBool ignoreIfRules = (iter.IsRightMostTable() || iter.IsLeftMostTable());
|
|
|
|
switch (info.owner) {
|
|
case eTableOwner:
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(this, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, PR_FALSE);
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColGroupOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
if (!iter.IsRightMostTable() && (xAdj > 0)) {
|
|
col = verInfo[xAdj - 1].col;
|
|
} // and fall through
|
|
case eColGroupOwner:
|
|
if (col) {
|
|
nsIFrame* cg = col->GetParent();
|
|
if (cg) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(cg, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
if (!iter.IsRightMostTable() && (xAdj > 0)) {
|
|
col = verInfo[xAdj - 1].col;
|
|
} // and fall through
|
|
case eColOwner:
|
|
if (col) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(col, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "program error"); // and fall through
|
|
case eRowGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iter.IsLeftMostTable() || iter.IsRightMostTable(), "program error");
|
|
if (rowGroup) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(rowGroup, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "program error"); // and fall through
|
|
case eRowOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iter.IsLeftMostTable() || iter.IsRightMostTable(), "program error");
|
|
if (row) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(row, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaCellOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_RIGHT;
|
|
cell = info.ajaCell; // and fall through
|
|
case eCellOwner:
|
|
if (cell) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(cell, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(info.segWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
nsRect segRect(info.colX - nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(largeHalf), info.segY,
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(info.segWidth), info.segHeight);
|
|
nscoord bottomBevelOffset = (endBevel) ? nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(bottomHorSegHeight) : 0;
|
|
PRUint8 bottomBevelSide = ((horSegHeight > 0) ^ !tableIsLTR) ? NS_SIDE_RIGHT : NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
PRUint8 topBevelSide = ((info.bevelSide == NS_SIDE_RIGHT) ^ !tableIsLTR)? NS_SIDE_RIGHT : NS_SIDE_LEFT;
|
|
nsCSSRendering::DrawTableBorderSegment(aRenderingContext, style, color, bgColor, segRect, nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel(),
|
|
topBevelSide, nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(info.bevelOffset),
|
|
bottomBevelSide, bottomBevelOffset);
|
|
} // if (info.segWidth > 0)
|
|
info.segY = info.segY + info.segHeight - endOffset;
|
|
} // if (info.segHeight > 0)
|
|
info.Start(iter, borderOwner, verSegWidth, prevHorSegHeight, horSegHeight, verInfo);
|
|
} // if (!iter.IsTopMost() && (isSegStart || iter.IsBottomMost()))
|
|
|
|
info.lastCell = iter.cell;
|
|
info.segHeight += rowRect.height;
|
|
prevHorSegHeight = horSegHeight;
|
|
} // for (iter.First(); !iter.atEnd; iter.Next())
|
|
|
|
// Next, paint all of the horizontal border segments from top to bottom reuse the verInfo
|
|
// array to keep tract of col widths and vertical segments for corner calculations
|
|
memset(verInfo, 0, damageArea.width * sizeof(BCVerticalSeg)); // XXX reinitialize properly
|
|
for (PRInt32 xIndex = 0; xIndex < damageArea.width; xIndex++) {
|
|
verInfo[xIndex].colWidth = -1;
|
|
}
|
|
PRInt32 nextY = startRowY;
|
|
BCHorizontalSeg horSeg;
|
|
|
|
iter.Reset(*this, *inFlowRG, *inFlowRow, damageArea);
|
|
for (iter.First(); !iter.atEnd; iter.Next()) {
|
|
nscoord leftSegWidth = (iter.bcData) ? iter.bcData->GetLeftEdge(ignoreBorderOwner, ignoreSegStart) : 0;
|
|
nscoord topSegHeight = (iter.bcData) ? iter.bcData->GetTopEdge(borderOwner, isSegStart) : 0;
|
|
|
|
PRInt32 xAdj = iter.x - iter.startX;
|
|
// store the current col width if it hasn't been already
|
|
if (verInfo[xAdj].colWidth < 0) {
|
|
if (iter.IsRightMostTable()) {
|
|
verInfo[xAdj].colWidth = verInfo[xAdj - 1].colWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* col = firstInFlow->GetColFrame(iter.x); if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
verInfo[xAdj].colWidth = col->GetSize().width;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
cornerSubWidth = (iter.bcData) ? iter.bcData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel) : 0;
|
|
nscoord verWidth = PR_MAX(verInfo[xAdj].segWidth, leftSegWidth);
|
|
if (iter.isNewRow || (iter.IsLeftMost() && iter.IsBottomMost())) {
|
|
horSeg.y = nextY;
|
|
nextY = nextY + iter.row->GetSize().height;
|
|
horSeg.x = startColX;
|
|
horSeg.Start(iter, borderOwner, ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, bevel, verInfo[xAdj].segWidth,
|
|
leftSegWidth, topSegHeight, verInfo[xAdj].lastCell, tableIsLTR);
|
|
}
|
|
PRBool verOwnsCorner = (NS_SIDE_TOP == ownerSide) || (NS_SIDE_BOTTOM == ownerSide);
|
|
if (!iter.IsLeftMost() && (isSegStart || iter.IsRightMost() || verOwnsCorner)) {
|
|
// paint the previous seg or the current one if iter.IsRightMost()
|
|
if (horSeg.width > 0) {
|
|
PRBool endBevel = (horSeg.height > 0) ? bevel : 0;
|
|
nscoord endOffset = CalcHorCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, verWidth, PR_FALSE, endBevel, tableIsLTR);
|
|
horSeg.width += endOffset;
|
|
if (horSeg.height > 0) {
|
|
// get the border style, color and paint the segment
|
|
PRUint8 side = (iter.IsBottomMost()) ? NS_SIDE_BOTTOM : NS_SIDE_TOP;
|
|
nsIFrame* rg = iter.rg; if (!rg) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* row = iter.row; if (!row) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* cell = horSeg.firstCell; if (!cell) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* col;
|
|
|
|
PRUint8 style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
nscolor color = 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
|
PRBool ignoreIfRules = (iter.IsTopMostTable() || iter.IsBottomMostTable());
|
|
|
|
switch (horSeg.owner) {
|
|
case eTableOwner:
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(this, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, PR_FALSE);
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "program error"); // and fall through
|
|
case eColGroupOwner: {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iter.IsTopMostTable() || iter.IsBottomMostTable(), "program error");
|
|
col = firstInFlow->GetColFrame(iter.x - 1); if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* cg = col->GetParent(); if (!cg) ABORT0();
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(cg, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
case eAjaColOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "program error"); // and fall through
|
|
case eColOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iter.IsTopMostTable() || iter.IsBottomMostTable(), "program error");
|
|
col = firstInFlow->GetColFrame(iter.x - 1); if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(col, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowGroupOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_BOTTOM;
|
|
rg = (iter.IsBottomMostTable()) ? iter.rg : iter.prevRg; // and fall through
|
|
case eRowGroupOwner:
|
|
if (rg) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(rg, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, ignoreIfRules);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_BOTTOM;
|
|
row = (iter.IsBottomMostTable()) ? iter.row : iter.prevRow; // and fall through
|
|
case eRowOwner:
|
|
if (row) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(row, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, iter.IsBottomMostTable());
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaCellOwner:
|
|
side = NS_SIDE_BOTTOM;
|
|
// if this is null due to the damage area origin-y > 0, then the border won't show up anyway
|
|
cell = horSeg.ajaCell;
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eCellOwner:
|
|
if (cell) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(cell, side, style, color, tableIsLTR, PR_FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(horSeg.height, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
nsRect segRect(horSeg.x, horSeg.y - nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(largeHalf), horSeg.width,
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(horSeg.height));
|
|
if (!tableIsLTR)
|
|
segRect.x -= segRect.width;
|
|
|
|
nscoord rightBevelOffset = (endBevel) ? nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(verWidth) : 0;
|
|
PRUint8 rightBevelSide = (leftSegWidth > 0) ? NS_SIDE_BOTTOM : NS_SIDE_TOP;
|
|
if (tableIsLTR) {
|
|
nsCSSRendering::DrawTableBorderSegment(aRenderingContext, style, color, bgColor, segRect, nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel(), horSeg.leftBevelSide,
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(horSeg.leftBevelOffset),
|
|
rightBevelSide, rightBevelOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsCSSRendering::DrawTableBorderSegment(aRenderingContext, style, color, bgColor, segRect, nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel(), rightBevelSide, rightBevelOffset,
|
|
horSeg.leftBevelSide, nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(horSeg.leftBevelOffset));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
} // if (horSeg.height > 0)
|
|
horSeg.x += colInc * (horSeg.width - endOffset);
|
|
} // if (horSeg.width > 0)
|
|
horSeg.Start(iter, borderOwner, ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, bevel, verInfo[xAdj].segWidth,
|
|
leftSegWidth, topSegHeight, verInfo[xAdj].lastCell, tableIsLTR);
|
|
} // if (!iter.IsLeftMost() && (isSegStart || iter.IsRightMost() || verOwnsCorner))
|
|
horSeg.width += verInfo[xAdj].colWidth;
|
|
verInfo[xAdj].segWidth = leftSegWidth;
|
|
verInfo[xAdj].lastCell = iter.cell;
|
|
}
|
|
delete [] verInfo;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
|
|
static PRBool
|
|
GetFrameTypeName(nsIAtom* aFrameType,
|
|
char* aName)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool isTable = PR_FALSE;
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableOuterFrame == aFrameType)
|
|
strcpy(aName, "Tbl");
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == aFrameType) {
|
|
strcpy(aName, "Tbl");
|
|
isTable = PR_TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == aFrameType)
|
|
strcpy(aName, "RowG");
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == aFrameType)
|
|
strcpy(aName, "Row");
|
|
else if (IS_TABLE_CELL(aFrameType))
|
|
strcpy(aName, "Cell");
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::blockFrame == aFrameType)
|
|
strcpy(aName, "Block");
|
|
else
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(PR_FALSE, "invalid call to GetFrameTypeName");
|
|
|
|
return isTable;
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::RowHasSpanningCells(PRInt32 aRowIndex, PRInt32 aNumEffCols)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->RowHasSpanningCells(aRowIndex, aNumEffCols);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::RowIsSpannedInto(PRInt32 aRowIndex, PRInt32 aNumEffCols)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->RowIsSpannedInto(aRowIndex, aNumEffCols);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::ColHasSpanningCells(PRInt32 aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nsTableCellMap * cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->ColHasSpanningCells(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PRBool nsTableFrame::ColIsSpannedInto(PRInt32 aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
PRBool result = PR_FALSE;
|
|
nsTableCellMap * cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->ColIsSpannedInto(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Destructor function for nscoord properties
|
|
static void
|
|
DestroyCoordFunc(void* aFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aPropertyName,
|
|
void* aPropertyValue,
|
|
void* aDtorData)
|
|
{
|
|
delete static_cast<nscoord*>(aPropertyValue);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Destructor function point properties
|
|
static void
|
|
DestroyPointFunc(void* aFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aPropertyName,
|
|
void* aPropertyValue,
|
|
void* aDtorData)
|
|
{
|
|
delete static_cast<nsPoint*>(aPropertyValue);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Destructor function for nscoord properties
|
|
static void
|
|
DestroyBCPropertyDataFunc(void* aFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aPropertyName,
|
|
void* aPropertyValue,
|
|
void* aDtorData)
|
|
{
|
|
delete static_cast<BCPropertyData*>(aPropertyValue);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetProperty(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aPropertyName,
|
|
PRBool aCreateIfNecessary)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPropertyTable *propTable = aFrame->PresContext()->PropertyTable();
|
|
void *value = propTable->GetProperty(aFrame, aPropertyName);
|
|
if (value) {
|
|
return (nsPoint*)value; // the property already exists
|
|
}
|
|
if (aCreateIfNecessary) {
|
|
// The property isn't set yet, so allocate a new value, set the property,
|
|
// and return the newly allocated value
|
|
NSPropertyDtorFunc dtorFunc = nsnull;
|
|
if (aPropertyName == nsGkAtoms::collapseOffsetProperty) {
|
|
value = new nsPoint(0, 0);
|
|
dtorFunc = DestroyPointFunc;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aPropertyName == nsGkAtoms::rowUnpaginatedHeightProperty) {
|
|
value = new nscoord;
|
|
dtorFunc = DestroyCoordFunc;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aPropertyName == nsGkAtoms::tableBCProperty) {
|
|
value = new BCPropertyData;
|
|
dtorFunc = DestroyBCPropertyDataFunc;
|
|
}
|
|
if (value) {
|
|
propTable->SetProperty(aFrame, aPropertyName, value, dtorFunc, nsnull);
|
|
}
|
|
return value;
|
|
}
|
|
return nsnull;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateFrame(nsIFrame* aFrame, const nsRect& aOrigRect,
|
|
PRBool aIsFirstReflow)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* parent = aFrame->GetParent();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(parent, "What happened here?");
|
|
|
|
if (parent->GetStateBits() & NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW) {
|
|
// Don't bother; we'll invalidate the parent's overflow rect when
|
|
// we finish reflowing it.
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aIsFirstReflow || aOrigRect.TopLeft() != aFrame->GetPosition()) {
|
|
aFrame->InvalidateOverflowRect();
|
|
} else {
|
|
parent->InvalidateRectDifference(aOrigRect, aFrame->GetRect());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
#define MAX_SIZE 128
|
|
#define MIN_INDENT 30
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
void DumpTableFramesRecur(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
PRUint32 aIndent)
|
|
{
|
|
char indent[MAX_SIZE + 1];
|
|
aIndent = PR_MIN(aIndent, MAX_SIZE - MIN_INDENT);
|
|
memset (indent, ' ', aIndent + MIN_INDENT);
|
|
indent[aIndent + MIN_INDENT] = 0;
|
|
|
|
char fName[MAX_SIZE];
|
|
nsIAtom* fType = aFrame->GetType();
|
|
GetFrameTypeName(fType, fName);
|
|
|
|
printf("%s%s %p", indent, fName, aFrame);
|
|
nsIFrame* flowFrame = aFrame->GetPrevInFlow();
|
|
if (flowFrame) {
|
|
printf(" pif=%p", flowFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
flowFrame = aFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
if (flowFrame) {
|
|
printf(" nif=%p", flowFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == fType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == fType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == fType ||
|
|
IS_TABLE_CELL(fType)) {
|
|
nsIFrame* child = aFrame->GetFirstChild(nsnull);
|
|
while(child) {
|
|
DumpTableFramesRecur(child, aIndent+1);
|
|
child = child->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DumpTableFrames(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFrame = nsnull;
|
|
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == aFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
tableFrame = nsTableFrame::GetTableFrame(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(tableFrame->GetFirstInFlow());
|
|
while (tableFrame) {
|
|
DumpTableFramesRecur(tableFrame, 0);
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(tableFrame->GetNextInFlow());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|